JP7354354B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Gaming machines such as pachinko machines can perform performances using various performance means such as image display means, audio output means, lamps, and movable bodies. In many productions, the display production by image display means is the main feature, and sound production, lamp production, movable body production, etc. are executed in synchronization with this display production (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-010584

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform performances more suitably .

The present invention provides a gaming machine which is equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying symbols in a variable manner, and is capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stopped symbols after fluctuation by the symbol display means become in a specific manner. A specific notice can be executed while the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the specific notice includes a first half that does not yet suggest the possibility of the specific mode, and a second half that suggests the possibility of the specific mode after the first half. an audio output means capable of outputting a sound related to the specific notice when executing the specific notice; and an audio output means capable of generating a vibration sound by vibrating a predetermined part when executing the specific notice; vibration sound generation means, and volume level setting means capable of setting the volume level of the audio output means between a maximum volume level and a minimum volume level, and the vibration sound generation means is configured to set the volume level of the audio output means between a maximum volume level and a minimum volume level , and the vibration sound generation means When executing the vibration sound, the vibration sound is generated for a predetermined period of time, and the sound related to the specific notice in the second half section is audible regardless of the volume level, and when the vibration sound is set to the maximum volume level , the vibration sound is generated for a predetermined time. It is configured such that it is easy to hear the sound, but becomes difficult to hear the vibration sound when the volume level is set to the minimum volume level .

According to the present invention, it is possible to perform effects more suitably .

1 is an overall front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the same pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the glass door of the same pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a plan view of main parts showing a performance button, a cross operation means, a volume adjustment operation means, a light amount adjustment operation means, etc. of the same pachinko machine. It is a front sectional view of the operation performance means of the same pachinko machine and its vicinity. It is a side cross-sectional view of the operation performance means of the same pachinko machine and its vicinity. It is a front sectional view showing a state where the production button of the same pachinko machine is pressed down. It is a front view of the game board of the same pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game information display means of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing operation of a board movable body of the same pachinko machine. It is a back view of the same pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of the control system of the same pachinko machine. It is a diagram showing the connection relationship between the LED common port and LED data port of the same pachinko machine, game information display means, and performance information display means (setting display means, performance display means). It is a diagram showing the correspondence between transition branch determination patterns and transition branch destinations based on the door open signal, RAM clear switch signal, and setting key switch signal of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart (first half) of the power-on process of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart (second half) of the power-on process of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting change process of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the power supply abnormality check process of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot determination process of the same pachinko machine. It is a diagram showing the jackpot determination table (6 settings) of the same pachinko machine and the contents of first to third information therein. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the distribution of judgment values related to jackpot judgment of the same pachinko machine, in which (a) shows the case of setting 1, and (b) shows the case of setting 6. It is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table (setting 1 stage) of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of LED management processing of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the LED common output selection table of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the out-of-use area processing of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the LED update process outside the use area of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the volume adjustment notification image of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the light intensity adjustment notification image of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the change state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is displayed in the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the reset condition and reset process of the volume level of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of image production and sound production in the pachinko machine's reservation change notice. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the volume history of the sound production shown in FIG. 33 divided into normal sound production and specific sound production. It is a diagram showing the relationship between a first volume LP1 (dB), a second volume LP2 (dB), and a composite volume LP (dB) obtained by combining them. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of image production and sound production during normal fluctuation (during a probability variation state) of the same pachinko machine. 37 is a diagram illustrating a part of the volume history of the sound production shown in FIG. 36, divided into normal sound production and specific sound production. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (1/2) of image production and sound production during normal fluctuations (during normal gaming state) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (2/2) of image production and sound production during normal fluctuations (during normal gaming state) of the same pachinko machine. 39 is a diagram illustrating a part of the volume history of the sound production shown in FIG. 38, divided into normal sound production and specific sound production. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (1/5) of image production and sound production in reach production (low reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (2/5) of image production and sound production in reach production (low reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (3/5) of image production and sound production in reach production (low reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing a flow (4/5) of image production and sound production in reach production (low reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (5/5) of image production and sound production in reach production (low reliability) of the same pachinko machine. 42 is a diagram showing the portion from 42s to 61s in the volume history of the sound production shown in FIG. 41, divided into normal sound production and specific sound production. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the portion from 92s to 96s in the volume history of the sound production shown in FIG. 43, divided into normal sound production and specific sound production. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (1/5) of image production and sound production in reach production (high reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (2/5) of image production and sound production in reach production (high reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (3/5) of image production and sound production in reach production (high reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of image production and sound production (4/5) in reach production (high reliability) of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow (5/5) of image production and sound production in reach production (high reliability) of the same pachinko machine. 47 is a diagram showing the portion from 42s to 61s in the volume history of the sound production shown in FIG. 46, divided into normal sound production and specific sound production. FIG. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the Pachinko machine based on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the change state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is displayed in the same pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the history of the volume in the normal sound performance and the specific sound performance when the hall setting value is set to T7 in the same pachinko machine for each volume level. It is a figure showing the history of the volume in the normal sound performance and the specific sound performance when the hall setting value is set to T3 in the same pachinko machine for each volume level. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the Pachinko machine based on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the change state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is displayed in the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the Pachinko machine based on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the change state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is displayed in the same pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the volume level setting table of the Pachinko machine concerning the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the change state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is displayed in the same pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the volume level setting table of the Pachinko machine concerning the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the volume adjustment notification image of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the change state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is displayed in the same pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the history of the volume in the normal sound performance and the specific sound performance when the hall setting value is set to T7 in the same pachinko machine for each volume level. It is a figure showing the history of the volume in the normal sound performance and the specific sound performance when the hall setting value is set to T3 in the same pachinko machine for each volume level. It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table of the Pachinko machine based on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the change state of the volume and the volume adjustment notification image when the volume adjustment knob is operated while the volume adjustment notification image is displayed in the same pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the volume level setting table of the Pachinko machine concerning the 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the volume level setting table of the Pachinko machine concerning the 9th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the volume level setting table of the Pachinko machine concerning the 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a change of the volume level setting table of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the volume level setting table of the Pachinko machine concerning the 11th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the volume level setting table of the Pachinko machine concerning the 12th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the volume level setting table of the Pachinko machine concerning the 13th embodiment of the present invention. Volume level setting table (a) regarding game volume of a pachinko machine according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention, first to third examples (b) to (d) of volume level setting tables regarding error volume, for specific notification sound It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table (e) of. Volume level setting table (a) regarding game volume of a pachinko machine according to the 15th embodiment of the present invention, first to third examples (b) to (d) of volume level setting tables regarding error volume, for specific notification sound It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table (e) of. Volume level setting table (a) regarding game volume of a pachinko machine according to the 16th embodiment of the present invention, first to third examples (b) to (d) of volume level setting tables regarding error volume, for specific notification sound It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table (e) of. Volume level setting table (a) regarding game volume of a pachinko machine according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention, first to third examples (b) to (d) of volume level setting tables regarding error volume, for specific notification sound It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table (e) of. Volume level setting table (a) regarding game volume of a pachinko machine according to the 18th embodiment of the present invention, first to third examples (b) to (d) of volume level setting tables regarding error volume, for specific notification sound It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table (e) of. Volume level setting table (a) regarding game volume of a pachinko machine according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention, first to third examples (b) to (d) of volume level setting tables regarding error volume, and for specific notification sound It is a figure which shows the volume level setting table (e) of. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot determination process of the Pachinko machine based on the 20th Embodiment of this invention. It is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table (6 settings) of the same pachinko machine. It is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table (setting 1 stage) of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the setting example of various matters before and after the production|presentation which steals the eye during one symbol change.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the invention will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 to 48-1 illustrate a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine. In FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine main body 1 includes an outer frame 2 and a front frame 3 disposed in front of the outer frame 2. The front frame 3 is pivotally connected to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and detachable via a vertical first hinge 4 disposed at one end in the left and right direction, for example, on the left end. The outer frame 2 can be locked in a closed state by a locking means 5 provided on the opposite side, for example, on the right end side.

The front frame 3 includes a middle frame 6 and a glass door 7 arranged in front of the middle frame 6. The glass door 7 is pivotally connected to the middle frame 6 so as to be openable and detachable via a vertical second hinge 8 disposed at one end in the left and right direction, for example, on the left end. It can be locked in the closed position.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular shape by a pair of left and right vertical frame members 2a, 2b and a pair of upper and lower horizontal frame members 2c, 2d. A front cover member 9 made of, for example, synthetic resin is attached to the front lower part of the outer frame 2 so as to connect the front lower parts of the left and right vertical frame members 2a and 2b along the front edge of the lower horizontal frame member 2d. There is. The front cover member 9 projects further forward than the left and right vertical frame members 2a and 2b, and the middle frame 6 is disposed above it. Further, in the outer frame 2, an upper outer frame hinge metal fitting 11 constituting the first hinge 4 is arranged, for example, at the upper left, and a lower outer frame hinge metal fitting 12 is arranged above the front cover member 9 at the lower left.

The middle frame 6 is made of synthetic resin, and includes a rectangular frame 13 that can substantially abut against the front edge side of the outer frame 2 above the front cover member 9, and a game board provided on the upper side inside this frame 13. For example, the mounting portion 14 and the lower mounting portion 15 provided on the lower side within the frame portion 13 are integrally provided. A game board 16 is detachably mounted on the game board mounting section 14, for example, from the front side, and a firing means 17, a lower speaker 18, etc. are arranged on the front side of the lower mounting section 15. Further, in the middle frame 6, a main body frame upper hinge fitting 19 constituting the first hinge 4 and a main body frame upper hinge fitting 20 constituting the second hinge 8 are arranged on the upper left side of the middle frame 6, and the first and second hinges 4, 8 The lower hinge fittings 21 of the main body frame are arranged, for example, at the lower left part.

The glass door 7 includes a resin door base 22 formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the middle frame 6. In this door base 22, a window hole 24a of a glass window 24 is formed corresponding to the front side of the game area 23 formed on the game board 16, and for example, a plurality of (here, four) windows are formed around the window hole 24a. Various production means such as an upper speaker 25, a first frame movable body 26, a second frame movable body 27, and an air blower 28 are arranged.

On the upper front side of the door base 22, a side unit 30 is attached to at least a part of the outer periphery of the window hole 24a, for example, a substantially L-shaped part corresponding to the upper side and right side of the window hole 24a, and the other part, For example, an upper decorative cover 31 is attached to the left side of the window hole 24a. As shown in FIGS. 2, 3, etc., the side unit 30 can be used, for example, with the front frame 3 opened and the fixing screws 30a, fixing lever 30b, etc. on the back side of the front frame 3 removed without using any special tools. It can be easily attached and detached by operation. Normally, the front frame 3 is commonly used for multiple models, and by attaching a different game board 16 to the front frame 3 for each model, it is possible to realize the unique gameplay and design of that model, but this pachinko machine In this machine, a part of the front side of the front frame 3 is made into a side unit 30 that can be easily attached and detached compared to other parts, and this side unit 30 has a design that has a sense of unity with the game board 16 and a unique function. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design and function for each model while making most of the front frame 3 common.

The side unit 30 of this embodiment is equipped with a first frame movable body 26, a second frame movable body 27, an air blower 28, and the like. The frame first movable body 26 can be slid approximately in the front-back direction by driving by a drive means (not shown). The frame second movable body 27 can be slid substantially in the front and rear directions by driving a drive means (not shown), and can also be pushed by the player. The air blowing means 28 is capable of sending air toward the player's hand at the timing when the player operates the frame second movable body 27.

On the lower front side of the door base 22, there is an upper tray 33 for storing game balls put out from the payout means 32 arranged at the rear side of the middle frame 6 and supplying them to the firing means 17. A lower tray 34 for storing surplus balls, etc., a firing handle 35 operated to operate the firing means 17, etc. are arranged, and a lower decorative cover 36 that substantially covers the upper tray 33, lower tray 34, etc. from the front side is attached. has been done. The lower decorative cover 36 is formed, for example, in a forward-facing bulge shape, and is provided with operating means such as an operation presentation means 37, a cross operation means 38, a volume operation means 39, a light amount operation means 40, etc. on its upper side, for example. (Figure 4).

The operation performance means 37 is used for preview performances during symbol changes and other performances, and as shown in FIGS. It is provided with a movable performance means 42 arranged inside the performance button 41 and a vibration generation means 43 for vibrating the performance button 41, and is arranged inside the lower decorative cover 36.

The movable effect means 42 includes a rotating body 44 formed in a substantially spherical shape, a left-right shaft member 45 that rotatably supports the rotating body 44, a light emitting board 46 disposed within the rotating body 44, and a rotating body. 44, and a support frame 48 that supports the shaft member 45, the rotation drive means 47, and the like.

The rotating body 44 is formed in a hollow shape from a light-transmitting synthetic resin, and is rotatably supported by a shaft member 45 via cylindrical rotating shafts 49a and 49b fixed on both left and right sides thereof. The shaft member 45 passes through the rotating body 44 from side to side, and a light emitting board 46 is fixed approximately at the center thereof. The light emitting board 46 is for illuminating the rotating body 44 from inside, and has, for example, a plurality of LEDs 50 arranged on its upper surface side.

The support frame 48 is formed into a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front by a pair of left and right vertical frames 48a, 48b and a horizontal frame 48c that connects the lower ends of the vertical frames 48a, 48b to the left and right. Both left and right end portions of the shaft member 45 are detachably fixed to the upper sides of the frames 48a and 48b. A rotation drive means 47 made of a stepping motor or the like is fixed to one of the vertical frames 48a, 48b (here, the right vertical frame 48b) with a drive shaft 47a protruding inward. Further, a driven gear 51 is provided on one of the left and right rotating shafts 49a, 49b (here, the right rotating shaft 49b), and the driven gear 51 is connected to the drive shaft 47a of the rotational drive means 47. The attached drive gear 52 is in mesh. As a result, when the rotation drive means 47 operates in the forward or reverse direction, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating body 44 via the driving gear 52 and the driven gear 51, and the rotating body 44 rotates around the axis in the left and right direction. do.

The support frame 48 is supported by the door base 22 via, for example, an effect button base 53 fixed to the lower side thereof. The production button base 53 is made of sheet metal, for example, and includes a rectangular mounting plate 54 arranged substantially horizontally along the lower surface of the horizontal frame 48c, and extending downward from both left and right edges of the mounting plate 54. A pair of left and right connecting plates 55a, 55b, base plates 56a, 56b extending outward in the left and right direction from the lower edges of the left and right connecting plates 55a, 55b, and base plates 56a, 56b extending downward from the rear edge side of the mounting plate 54, for example. The mounting plate 54 is fixed to the horizontal frame 48c, and the support plate 57 is fixed to a fixing member 58 attached to the front side of the door base 22, for example.

The production button 41 constitutes a cover body that covers the internal movable production means 42, and is made of transparent or semi-transparent synthetic resin, and includes a substantially cylindrical body 61 arranged vertically, and a body 61 arranged vertically. It is integrally provided with a substantially spherical operating portion 62 formed to substantially close the upper end side of the body portion 61 . The body portion 61 is provided with cutout portions 64a and 64b formed upward from the lower end side on the left and right side surfaces thereof. The production button 41 is mounted from above so as to cover the movable production means 42, with rotating shafts 49a and 49b loosely fitted into the left and right notches 64a and 64b, and the operation part 62 on the upper side is attached to the lower decoration. It is exposed upward from a button hole 65 formed in the cover 36.

A substantially circular elevating plate 66 disposed substantially horizontally between the horizontal frame 48c and the base plates 56a, 56b is detachably fixed to the lower end of the production button 41. An insertion hole 67 is formed approximately in the center of the elevating plate 66, and the upper side of the production button base 53 is vertically inserted into this insertion hole 67.

The elevating plate 66 has a plurality of guide pins 68, for example, two guide pins 68 on the left and right, two on the front and rear, a total of four guide pins 68 projecting downward. These guide pins 68 are for guiding the production button 41 in the vertical direction, and are inserted downward into guide holes 69 formed in the base plates 56a and 56b. Further, a coil spring 70 is attached to each guide pin 68. This coil spring 70 has a larger diameter than the guide hole 69, and is arranged between the elevating plate 66 and the base plates 56a, 56b. It is elastically biased.

The production button 41 is held in an upper non-operating position (shown by a solid line in FIGS. 5 and 6 and a two-dot chain line in FIG. 7) by the horizontal frame 48c restricting upward movement of the elevating plate 66. A plurality of buffer members 71 made of an elastic material such as silicone rubber are arranged between the horizontal frame 48c and the elevating plate 66. The elevating plate 66, which is elastically biased upward by the coil spring 70, The upward movement is restricted by contacting the lower surface side of the horizontal frame 48c. Note that the buffer member 71 may be attached to either the horizontal frame 48c or the elevating plate 66.

A vibration generating means 43 is attached to the lower side of the production button base 53. The vibration generating means 43 includes a vibration device 72 and a vibration base 73 that vibrates due to the operation of the vibration device 72, and the vibration base 73 is connected to the production button base via a cushion member 74 made of an elastic material such as silicon rubber 53 base plates 56a and 56b. A plurality of guide pin insertion holes 75 are provided in the vibration base 73, and guide pins 68 are inserted downward into the guide pin insertion holes 75, respectively.

The vibration device 72 is constituted by a motor with an eccentric weight 72a attached to a drive shaft, and the vibration device 72 is configured with the eccentric weight 72a facing forward so that the position of the eccentric weight 72a does not coincide with the center of gravity of the vibration base 73. It is detachably fixed approximately at the center of the lower surface of the vibration base 73. By operating this vibration device 72, the vibration base 73 supported via the cushion member 74 vibrates with respect to the production button base 53, and the vibration causes the guide pin 68 inserted into the guide pin insertion hole 75 to vibrate. It is transmitted to the production button 41 via the button.

By the way, performances using movable bodies have the aspect of movable performances that appeal to the player's visual or tactile senses through the movement of the movable bodies, and the aspect of sound performances that similarly appeal to the player's sense of hearing. Of course, there are movable bodies in which the sound effect is not substantially generated, such as when the operating sound of the movable body is extremely low or there is no sound.

Of the two movable bodies (rotating body 44, performance button 41) that the operation performance means 37 has, the player cannot visually recognize the rotational movement of the rotary body 44 that rotates by the drive of the rotational drive means 47. (movable effect), and the operational sound such as "clack" caused by the drive of the rotary drive means 47 can be aurally recognized (sound effect). In addition, regarding the performance button 41 that vibrates due to the drive of the vibration device 72, the player can recognize the vibration of the performance button 41 through the tactile sense of the hand (movable performance), and the operation sound generated by the vibration (vibration sound). ) can be recognized by hearing (sound production).

Here, among the movable effects and sound effects related to the operation of the effect button 41, the movable effects that appeal to the player's tactile sense are not realized unless the player touches the effect button 41, but the sounds that appeal to the player's auditory sense The effect is established regardless of whether the player touches the effect button 41 or not. However, regarding the sound production, the volume of the generated operation sound (vibration sound) changes depending on whether the player is touching the production button 41 or not, and whether or not the player is pressing the production button 41.

That is, when the vibrating device 72 is operated without the player touching the production button 41, the operating sound is (1) the operating sound of the vibrating device 72, and (2) the sound between the vibrating base 73 and the guide pin 68. (3) contact sound between the elevating plate 66 and the horizontal frame 48c (via the buffer member 71), (4) contact sound from other joint parts (play), etc. On the other hand, when the vibration device 72 is activated while the player is touching the production button 41, the operating sound (1) is the same as when the player is not touching the production button 41, but the game The person's hand acts as a cushioning material to restrict the driving of the production button (predetermined part) 41 by the vibration device (driving means) 72, and the vibration of the production button 41 is suppressed, so that the contact sounds of (2) to (4) are suppressed. is lower than when the player is not touching the performance button 41, and the operation sound is lower overall. Furthermore, when the vibrating device 72 is activated while the player is not only touching the production button 41 but also pressing it, the elevating plate 66 of the production button 41 moves to the horizontal frame 48c as shown in FIG. Since the contact sound of (3) is not generated, the operating sound is further reduced. In this way, the volume of the vibration sound of the performance button 41 (the volume of the specific sound performance) becomes the maximum volume when the player does not touch the performance button 41 (when the specific volume changing operation is not performed).

As shown in FIG. 4, the cross-shaped operation means 38 includes four operation keys 38a to 38d, up, down, left, and right, and is used in situations where operations such as moving the cursor up, down, left, and right are required, such as when selecting menu items. . The volume operation means (O operation means, first operation means) 39 is used by the player to adjust the volume, and is provided with a plus key 39a and a minus key 39b as shown in FIG. By operating the two operation keys 39a and 39b, the player setting value (Otsu value) regarding the volume can be set in a plurality of levels, for example, in any of five levels M1 to M5. The light amount operation means 40 is used by the player to adjust the light amount, and as shown in FIG. 4, it includes a plus key 40a and a minus key 40b, and the player operates these two operation keys 40a and 40b. This makes it possible to set the light amount level in multiple stages, for example, in any one of 1 to 3.

In this embodiment, a volume operation means 39 dedicated to volume adjustment and a light amount operation means 40 dedicated to light amount adjustment are provided, but instead of providing these, general-purpose operation means such as the cross operation means 38 are used for volume adjustment and light amount adjustment. It may also be used for adjustment.

As shown in FIG. 2, a glass unit 80 that substantially closes the window hole 24a from the rear side is removably attached to the back side of the door base 22, and a glass unit 80 is attached to the edges of the first and second hinges 4 and 8. A reinforcing sheet metal 81a for the hinge end side in the vertical direction is placed along the edge of the opening/closing end side in the vertical direction, a reinforcing sheet metal 81b for the opening/closing end side in the vertical direction is placed along the edge of the opening/closing end side, and a left and right reinforcing sheet metal 81b is placed below the window hole 24a. A lower reinforcing sheet metal 81c in the direction is detachably fixed by screws or the like. Further, on the door base 22, a glass door upper hinge metal fitting 82a constituting the second hinge 8 is arranged, for example, at the upper left, and a glass door lower hinge metal fitting 82b is arranged, for example, at the lower left.

Further, for example, a ball feeding unit 83a, a lower tray guide unit 83b, etc. are attached to the back side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 81c. The ball feeding unit 83a is for feeding the game balls in the upper tray 33 to the firing means 17 one by one, and is arranged corresponding to the front side of the firing means 17. The lower tray guide unit 83b guides surplus balls when the upper tray 33 is full and foul balls that have been fired by the firing means 17 but have returned without reaching the game area 23 to the lower tray 34. For example, it is arranged adjacent to the ball feeding unit 83a on the first and second hinges 4 and 8 sides thereof.

Further, for example, on the upper side of the middle frame 6, a door open switch 84 is provided that can detect whether or not the front frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2. The door open switch 84 is configured to be turned on when the front frame 3 opens forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and turned off when the front frame 3 is closed, for example.

As shown in FIG. 8, the game board 16 includes a base plate 85 made of, for example, a plywood board, and a guide rail 86 for guiding the game balls fired from the firing means 17 is arranged in an annular shape on the front side of the base plate 85. In addition, in the game area 23 inside the guide rail 86, in addition to unit parts such as a central display frame unit 87, a starting winning unit 88, and a normal winning unit 89, a large number of game nails (not shown) are arranged. A game information display means 90 is arranged outside the area 23, for example on the lower side. Of course, the game information display means 90 may be placed within the game area 23.

As shown in FIG. 9, the game information display means 90 includes, for example, four LED groups composed of eight LEDs 100, and these 32 LEDs 100 are used as the normal symbol display means 91 and the normal pending number display means. 92, first special symbol display means 93, second special symbol display means 94, first special reservation number display means 95, second special reservation number display means 96, fluctuation shortening notification means 97, right hit notification means 98, and number of rounds A predetermined number of them are assigned to each notification means 99. That is, the eight LEDs 100 belonging to the first and second LED groups 90a and 90b constitute the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94, respectively, and the eight LEDs 100 belonging to the third LED group 90c constitute two The 8 LEDs 100 are divided into 1st special reserved quantity display means 95, 2nd special reserved quantity display means 96, normal reserved quantity display means 92, and fluctuation shortening notification means 97, and belong to the 4th LED group 90d. Two of them constitute a normal symbol display means 91, the other two constitute a right-handed hitting informing means 98, and the remaining four constitute a round number informing means 99.

On the plurality of unit parts 87 to 89 of the game board 16, there are a normal symbol starting means 101, a first special symbol starting means 102, a second special symbol starting means 103, a big winning means 104, a plurality of normal winning means 105, etc. It is provided. Further, on the rear side of the base plate 85, in addition to the liquid crystal display means (image display means) 106, movable bodies such as a first plate movable body 107, a second plate movable body 108, a third plate movable body 109, etc. are arranged. There is. Of course, the image display means is not limited to liquid crystal display means.

The central display frame unit 87 constitutes a display frame for the liquid crystal display means 106 and the movable bodies 107 to 109. An opening window 110 corresponding to the rear liquid crystal display means 106 is formed approximately in the center, and the base plate It is removably mounted from the front side into a mounting hole (not shown) formed in the front-rear direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 8, the central display frame unit 87 includes a front mounting plate 111 that is disposed along the front surface of the base plate 85 outside the mounting hole and through which a game ball can pass, and a liquid crystal display means 106. A decorative frame 112 is arranged in a substantially gate shape in front view extending from both left and right sides to the upper side of the front side of the front mounting plate 111 and protrudes forward on the inner peripheral side of the front mounting plate 111, and a decorative frame 112 is arranged between the left and right lower end portions of the decorative frame 112. A stage 113 is provided. The game balls fired by the firing means 17 and entering the upper side of the game area 23 are distributed to the left and right at the top of the decorative frame 112, and are divided into a left downstream path 114a on the left side of the central display frame unit 87 and a right downstream path 114b on the right side. Flowing down either.

The central display frame unit 87 is provided with a warp entrance 115 into which game balls can flow, on at least one side of the left downstream path 114a and the right downstream path 114b, for example, on the left downstream path 114a side. The game balls that flowed into the warp entrance 115 while flowing down the left downstream path 114a roll freely in the left and right directions on the stage 113, and then fall into the center falling part 116 provided corresponding to the center of the game area 23 in the left and right direction. and other parts of the body. Further, on the upper side of the stage 113, an intrusion prevention means 117 is provided to prevent the game balls from intruding into the rear side due to rebound or the like.

The first plate movable body 107 and the third plate movable body 109 are both arranged in a horizontally elongated manner in front of the liquid crystal display means 106, and both left and right ends thereof are supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction outside the opening window 110. They can be moved up and down individually by a lifting drive means (not shown). The first movable body 107 of the board has its origin position at the upper side of the opening window 110 (FIG. 10(a)), and its maximum operating position (FIG. 10(b)) approximately at the center in the vertical direction. The origin position is below the opening window 110 (FIG. 10(a)), and the maximum operating position is at the lower front side of the opening window 110 (FIG. 10(c)). Note that when both the first movable panel 107 and the third movable panel 109 move to the maximum operating position, they are vertically adjacent to each other in front of the center of the liquid crystal display means 106 (FIG. 10(e)). .

The second board movable body 108 is a three-dimensional object formed into a predetermined shape, such as a character, and is placed in front of the first board movable body 107, and can be moved up and down integrally with the first board movable body 107. In addition, by driving a rotational drive means (not shown), the first movable plate 107 can be rotated about the central axis in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the second movable body 108 of the board is always visible from the front side through the opening window 110, but for example, when the first movable body 107 of the board is at the origin position, the second movable body 108 of the board is visible through the opening. It may be retracted above the window 110 so that at least a part of it cannot be seen from the front.

The second movable body 108 of the board has two functions: a "swinging motion" in which it rotates back and forth within a predetermined angle range (FIG. 10(d)), and a "rotating motion" in which it rotates 360 degrees or more (FIG. 10(e)). is possible. Note that although the swinging motion can be performed regardless of the position of the first movable body 107 of the board, the rotating motion can be performed only when the first movable body 107 of the board is at its maximum operating position, for example.

The starting winning unit 88 is arranged below the central display frame unit 87 as shown in FIG. 8, and is detachably attached to the base plate 85 from the front side. As shown in FIG. 8, the normal winning unit 89 is arranged below the central display frame unit 87 and to the left of the starting winning unit 88, and is detachably attached to the base plate 85 from the front side.

The normal symbol starting means 101 is for starting the variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display means 91, and is composed of a passage gate through which a game ball can pass, etc., and includes a passage detection means ( (not shown). As shown in FIG. 8, this normal symbol starting means 101 is provided, for example, on the front side of the front mounting plate 111 on the right side of the central display frame unit 87, and allows the game ball flowing down the right downstream path 114b to pass through. ing.

The normal symbol display means 91 is for displaying normal symbols in a variable manner, and as shown in FIG. Based on the detection, after the two LEDs 100 forming the normal symbol emit light in the normal fluctuating light emission pattern, the hit judgment randomness included in the normal random number information acquired when the normal symbol starting means 101 detects the game ball is detected. If the numerical value matches a predetermined hit determination value, the fluctuation is stopped in a winning manner, and in other cases, the variation is stopped in a losing manner. In addition, the two LEDs 100 that make up the normal symbol can display one or more winning modes and one or more losing modes depending on the combination of their light emitting modes (for example, lighting/extinguishing), and are usually fluctuating. The light emission pattern is such that, for example, a plurality of specific types (here, two types) of light emission modes are switched every predetermined time (for example, 128 ms).

In addition, when the normal symbol starting means 101 detects a game ball during the normal suspension period including the symbol fluctuation of the normal symbol display means 91 and the normal profit state, the obtained ordinary random number information is set in advance. The upper limit of the reserved number, for example 4, is stored and stored, and each time the normal reservation period ends, one symbol is used up and the normal symbols are changed. The number of stored pieces of normal random number information (the number of normal pending pieces) is notified to the player by the normal holding piece number display means 92 or the like. As shown in FIG. 9, the normal reservation number display means 92 is composed of, for example, two LEDs 100 in the game information display means 90, and the display means 92 is configured by, for example, two LEDs 100 in the game information display means 90. Depending on the combination, it is possible to display five types of normal hold counts from 0 to 4.

The first special symbol starting means 102 is for starting symbol variation by the first special symbol displaying means 93, and is constituted by a non-opening/closing winning means having no opening/closing means, and is a game ball that detects winning game balls. It is equipped with a detection means (not shown). As shown in FIG. 8, this first special symbol starting means 102 is provided, for example, in the starting winning unit 88, and is arranged in an upwardly opening shape on the lower side corresponding to the central falling part 116 of the stage 113. Due to the existence of a winning route from the warp entrance 115 on the downstream path 114a side through the stage 113, the probability of a game ball flowing down the left downstream path 114a is higher than that of a game ball flowing down the right downstream path 114b. It is possible to win. Note that when a game ball enters the first special symbol starting means 102, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls for each winning.

The second special symbol starting means 103 is for starting the symbol variation by the second special symbol display means 94, and by operating the opening/closing portion 118, the game ball can be placed in an open state in which winning is possible, or in a non-winning state (or in an open state). It is composed of an opening/closing type winning means that can be changed to a closed state (where it is difficult to win a prize), and is equipped with a game ball detection means (not shown) that detects a winning game ball. When the symbol becomes a winning pattern and a normal profit state occurs, the opening/closing part 118 changes from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

As shown in FIG. 8, this second special symbol starting means 103 is arranged, for example, on the front mounting plate 111 on the right side of the central display frame unit 87 and on the downstream side of the normal symbol starting means 101, and is located on the right downstream path. The game balls flowing down 114b can win prizes. In addition, the opening/closing part 118 is swingable, for example, around a rotation axis in the left and right direction provided on the lower side, and in the closed state, it is substantially flush with, for example, the front mounting plate 111, allowing the game ball to pass through the front side. In the open state, the front side of the front mounting plate 111 is sloped backwards, so that the game balls can be won backwards. When a game ball enters the second special symbol starting means 103, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls per winning.

The first special symbol display means (symbol display means) 93 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs 100 in the game information display means 90, as shown in FIG. 9, and the first special symbol starting means 102 detects a game ball. On the condition that, after the eight LEDs 100 constituting the first special symbol emit light in the special fluctuating light emission pattern, the first special random number information acquired when the first special symbol starting means 102 detects a game ball is included. If the jackpot judgment random value that is entered matches a predetermined jackpot judgment value, the first jackpot mode is used, and in other cases, the variation is stopped in the first miss mode. When the stopped symbols after the change of the first special symbol display means 93 become the first jackpot mode, a first special profit state occurs.

The second special symbol display means (symbol display means) 94 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs 100 in the game information display means 90, as shown in FIG. 9, and the second special symbol starting means 103 detects a game ball. On the condition that, after the eight LEDs 100 constituting the second special symbol emit light in the special fluctuating light emission pattern, the second special random number information acquired when the second special symbol starting means 103 detects the game ball is included. If the jackpot judgment random value that is entered matches a predetermined jackpot judgment value, the second jackpot mode is used, and in other cases, the variation is stopped in the second jackpot mode. When the stopped symbols after the change of the second special symbol display means 94 become the second jackpot mode, a second special profit state occurs.

The first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 each have one or more first and second jackpot modes and one or more first, The second deviation mode can be displayed, and the special fluctuating light emission pattern is such that, for example, a plurality of specific types (here, two types) of light emission modes are switched every predetermined time (for example, 128 ms).

In addition, the first and second special symbols are activated during the special suspension period, including during the symbol fluctuation of the first special symbol display means 93, during the symbol fluctuation of the second special symbol display means 94, and during the first and second special profit states. When the means 102 and 103 detect game balls, the first and second special random number information obtained thereby are stored on hold up to a predetermined upper limit, for example, 4 balls each. When the special reservation period ends, if the reservation memory on the second special symbol side is 1 or more, one reservation memory of the second special symbol is consumed, the second special symbol is changed, and the second special symbol is changed. When only the reserved memory on the special symbol side is 1 or more, one reserved memory of the first special symbol is consumed to change the first special symbol. In this way, in this embodiment, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not change, and when there is a pending memory on both the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, is designed to preferentially change the second special symbol.

Note that the stored numbers of the first and second special random number information (first and second special reservation numbers) are notified to the player by the first and second special reservation number display means 95, 96, liquid crystal display means 106, etc. Ru. Here, the first and second special reservation quantity display means 95, 96 are each composed of two LEDs 100 in the game information display means 90, as shown in FIG. ), it is possible to display five types of first and second special reservation numbers from 0 to 4.

The grand winning means 104 is an opening/closing winning means equipped with an opening/closing plate 119 that can be switched between an open state in which game balls can be won and a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and as shown in FIG. It is provided on the downstream side of the second special symbol starting means 103 and on the upstream side of the first special symbol starting means 102, so that the game ball flows down the right downstream path 114b rather than the game ball that has flowed down the left downstream path 114a. The game ball that has been played has a higher probability of winning. This big winning means 104 is a first prize that occurs when the first and second special symbols of the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 stop in the first and second jackpot modes (specific modes) after changing. , In the second special profit state, the opening/closing plate 119 is opened to the front according to one or more opening patterns, and the game balls that have fallen onto it are allowed to win inside. When game balls win in this big winning means 104, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls for each winning. In the following explanation, the first special profit state and the second special profit state are collectively referred to as a "jackpot game" (special game).

A plurality of opening patterns of the big winning means 104 in the jackpot game are provided, for example, 4R, 6R, 10R, etc. Each opening pattern, such as 4R, 6R, and 10R, is configured to carry out so-called rounds with balls out 4 times, 6 times, and 10 times, respectively. Here, in a round with balls being put out, after the big winning means 104 is opened, the number of winning balls to the big winning means 104 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) or a predetermined time (for example, 28 seconds) has elapsed. It is set to close the big prize winning means 104, and if the player hits the right hand aiming at the big winning means 104 on the right downstream path 114b side, he can easily win the maximum number of game balls and win a large amount of prize balls. Can be obtained. In addition to the rounds with balls being put out, an opening pattern may be provided in which the big winning means 104 has a round without balls being released for a very short time (for example, 0.2 seconds), or a round with no balls being put out. It is also possible to provide an open pattern of only one.

Further, the liquid crystal display means 106 can, for example, variably display the performance symbol 120 in parallel with the variably displaying of the first and second special symbols by the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94. It is possible to display various images such as first and second pending images X1 to X4, Y1 to Y4 indicating the second special pending number, and a variable pending image Z.

Here, the production pattern 120 includes a plurality of pattern rows (three in the left and right direction in this case) each consisting of a number pattern and a plurality of other patterns, and each pattern constituting each pattern row is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, it is composed of a symbol main body 120a made up of numbers such as 1 to 8, etc., and a decorative portion 120b such as characters attached to the symbol main body 120a. Note that the display mode of the effect pattern 120 can be arbitrarily changed by erasing, enlarging or reducing the decorative portion 120b, changing the display position, etc.

For example, the performance symbols 120 start to fluctuate by vertical scrolling or the like for each symbol row according to a predetermined variation pattern almost simultaneously with the start of variation of the first and second special symbols, and the symbols stopped on a predetermined effective line are arranged in a predetermined manner. For example, the final stop is made approximately at the same time as the first and second special symbols stop changing. In addition, in the production pattern 120, for example, when all the stop symbols on the active line are the same, it is a jackpot production mode, otherwise it is a loss production mode, and the first and second special symbols are the first and second jackpot modes. When this occurs, the performance pattern 120 becomes a jackpot performance mode, and when the first and second special symbols become the first and second losing modes, the performance pattern 120 becomes a winning performance mode.

Regarding the first and second pending images X1 to X4, Y1 to Y4, and the fluctuating pending image Z, the first and second pending images 2. When the number of special reserved images increases, one additional first and second reserved image X1~, Y1~ is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 106, and the first and second reserved images X1~, Y1~ are additionally displayed on the liquid crystal display means 106, and When the first and second special pending numbers decrease based on the start of a new variation of the first and second special symbols, for example, the pending image Z during variation is deleted and the first and second pending images X1 to , Y1 ~ toward the front side of the queue (for example, to the right side of the screen) one by one, and move the first and second held images X1 and Y1 at the top, which have been pushed out, to a predetermined position, for example, to create a new change. It is designed to change to a medium-holding image Z.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a back case 121 is attached to the back side of the game board 16 to support the liquid crystal display means 106 on the back side of the game board 16. A main board case 122 in which a board 122a is housed, a sub board case 123 in which a sub control board 123a is housed, etc. are removably attached.

Further, on the back side of the front frame 3, a back cover 125 that covers the back side of the game board 16 so as to be openable and closable is detachably attached, and on the upper side of the back cover 125, a game ball tank 126a and a tank rail 126b are arranged on the left and right sides. A payout means 32 and a payout passage 127 are respectively installed, and when a game ball enters the winning hole of the big winning means 104 or the like, or when a ball lending command is received from an automatic ball lending machine (not shown), the game is started. The game balls in the ball tank 126a are put out by the payout means 32 through the tank rail 126b, and the game balls are guided to the upper tray 33 through the payout passage 127. Note that the back cover 125 is arranged to cover substantially the entire sub-board case 123 and a portion of the upper side of the main board case 122 from the rear side.

Further, a board mounting stand 128 is removably attached to the lower back side of the front frame 3, and on the back side of this board mounting stand 128, a power board case 129 in which a power board 129a is stored, a payout control board 130a A payout board case 130 in which a board is stored is removably attached to each board. Note that, for example, the power supply board case 129 is provided with a power switch 138 that can be turned on and off from the outside of the power supply board case 129.

FIG. 12(a) is a schematic block diagram of the control system of this pachinko machine. In FIG. 12(a), a main control board (main control means) 122a controls gaming operations in an integrated manner, and includes a game information display means 90 on the game board 16, a normal symbol starting means 101, and a first special symbol starting means. The means 102, the second special symbol starting means 103, the big winning means 104, the ordinary winning means 105, etc. are connected, for example, via a relay board (not shown), etc., and below them, control commands from the main control board 122a are connected. A sub-control board (sub-control means) 123a performs performance control such as image display, audio output, illumination, and movable body drive based on the control commands from the main control board 122a, and payout control controls the payout means 32 based on control commands from the main control board 122a. A board 130a, a firing control board 131 that controls the firing means 17 based on a firing control signal, etc. from this payout control board 130a are connected.

Further, operating means such as a RAM clear switch 132 and a setting key switch 133, and display means such as a performance information display means 137 are connected to the main control board 122a. As shown in FIG. 11, both the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are operable from outside the main board case 122, and the performance information display means 137 is visible from the outside of the main board case 122. In this state, they are respectively attached to the main control board 122a. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 132, the setting key switch 133, and the performance information display means 137 are all arranged in positions that are not covered by the back cover 125.

The RAM clear switch 132 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, and can be pressed from the outside of the main board case 122, and is configured to be turned OFF when not operated and turned ON when pressed. ing. The setting key switch 133 is operated when changing settings, etc., and can be turned ON/OFF by inserting a dedicated setting key into the keyhole from outside the main board case 122 and rotating it. It has become. In this embodiment, by operating this setting key switch 133, etc., a plurality of setting values corresponding to the jackpot probability, that is, the probability that the first and second special symbols will be in a jackpot mode (the probability of winning in a random number lottery) are set. It is possible to change the settings in stages (here, settings 1 to 6, 6 stages). Details of this setting change etc. will be described later.

The performance information display means 137 constitutes the setting display means 134 and the performance display means 135, and includes, for example, four-digit 7-segment display sections 137a to 137d, so that it can be visually recognized through the transparent main board case 122. For example, it is mounted on the main control board 122a within the main board case 122, and functions as a setting display means 134 during a first period, and as a performance display means 135 during a second period different from the first period. It has become.

The setting display means 134 displays setting information indicating a setting value (here, any one of settings 1 to 6) in a different display mode depending on, for example, whether the setting value has not yet been finalized. Corresponding to settings 1 to 6, any one of "1" to "6" or "1." to "6." can be displayed on at least a part of the performance information display means 137, and is fixed during the setting change period. The setting information corresponding to the previous setting value is, for example, "1" to "6" without dots, and during the predetermined period after the setting change period and during the setting confirmation period, the setting information corresponding to the confirmed setting value is, for example, dots. The numbers "1." to "6." can be displayed respectively. Of course, it is also possible to express whether or not a setting value has not yet been finalized by displaying a different display format other than the presence or absence of a dot (for example, lighting/blinking), or displaying the same setting information corresponding to the setting value before and after the finalization. It may be displayed in the following manner.

In this embodiment, among the four-digit 7-segment display parts 137a to 137d of the performance information display means 137, the 7-segment display part 137d on the left end side in rear view, which is the closest to the front when the front frame 3 is opened, is displayed. Although used as the setting display means 134, for example, a 7-segment display section 137a other than the 7-segment display section 137d may be used as the setting display means 134, or 7-segment display sections 137c to 137d, 7-segment display sections 137b to 137d A 7-segment display section with two or more digits such as . . . may be used as the setting display means 134.

The performance display means 135 displays a so-called base value on at least a portion of the performance information display means 137, for example, 7-segment display sections 137a to 137d. The base value is an example of specific information obtained based on gaming results, and is calculated, for example, by the formula of "(Number of safes in low probability state) ÷ (Number of outs in low probability state) x 100." Note that the performance display means 135 of this embodiment can switch and display multiple types of base values, for example, four types: a real-time base value, a first cumulative base value, a second cumulative base value, and a third cumulative base value. . The real-time base value is a base value in real time during a unit measurement period until the number of outs reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60,000). The first to third cumulative base values are the cumulative base values for one to three previous unit measurement periods, respectively. Of course, only the base value in real time may be displayed, or one type, two types, or four or more types of cumulative base value may be displayed.

As described above, the RAM clear switch 132, setting key switch 133, and performance information display means 137 (setting display means 134 and performance display means 135) are all arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1, and In order to access, it is necessary to unlock and open the front frame 3, so anyone other than hall personnel etc. cannot operate the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133, and the performance information display means 137 ( It is also impossible to view the display contents of the setting display means 134 and performance display means 135).

Further, in this embodiment, drive control of the game information display means 90 and the performance information display means 137 is mainly performed using a dynamic lighting method. As shown in FIG. 13, the LED common port of the main control board 122a can output a 1-byte scanning signal of dynamic lighting commons C0 to C7, and among these, the lines of dynamic lighting commons C0 to C3 are used for gaming information. Lines of dynamic lighting commons C4 to C7 are connected to the LED groups 90a to 90d of the display means 90 to the 7-segment display sections 137a to 137d of the performance information display means 137, respectively.

Furthermore, it is possible to output 1 byte of dynamic lighting data D10 to D17, D20 to D27 from the LED data ports 0 and 1 of the main control board 122a, respectively, and the lines of dynamic lighting data D10 to D17 of the LED data port 0 are used for games. Lines of dynamic lighting data D20 to D27 of the LED data port 1 are connected to the LED groups 90a to 90d of the information display means 90 to the 7-segment display sections 137a to 137d of the performance information display means 137, respectively.

The sub-control board 123a includes various production means to be controlled, such as a liquid crystal display means (display means) 106, speakers (audio output means) 18, 25, a first frame movable body 26, a second frame movable body 27, and an air blower. In addition to means 28, illumination means 136, movable performance means 42, vibration generation means 43, first board movable body 107, second board movable body 108, third board movable body 109, etc., performance buttons that can be operated by the player. 41, various operation means such as a cross operation means 38, a volume operation means 39, a light amount operation means 40, a side unit connection detection means 139, etc. are connected. The illumination means 136 is composed of a large number of LEDs (not shown) arranged on the front frame 3 side and the game board 16 side. The side unit connection detection means 139 detects the connection state of the side unit 30, and is turned ON when the side unit 30 is properly attached to and connected to the front frame 3, and turned OFF when not. It is composed of

Further, a volume adjustment knob (instep operation means, second operation means) 140 is connected to the sub-control board 123a. The volume adjustment knob 140 is used by hall personnel and the like to perform selection operations regarding the volume, and can be switched to multiple stages (here, 10 stages corresponding to hall setting values T0 to T9, see FIGS. 28 and 31). It is composed of a rotary switch, and is mounted on the sub-control board 123a so as to be operable from the outside of the sub-board case 123, as shown in FIG. In this way, the volume adjustment knob 140 is located on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1, and in order to operate it, it is necessary to unlock and open the front frame 3, so it cannot be operated by anyone other than the hall personnel. I can't.

Note that the volume adjustment operation means provided on the rear side of the game machine main body 1 may be of any type as long as it can be switched to a plurality of levels, and may be a dip switch or the like. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, since the back cover 125 covers the rear side of the sub-board case 123, the volume adjustment knob 140 cannot be operated unless the back cover 125 is opened. By providing the back cover 125 with a cutout or opening corresponding to the volume adjustment knob 140, the volume adjustment knob 140 may be operable while the back cover 125 is closed.

Next, the power-on process (FIGS. 15 and 16) executed in the main control board 122a when the power is turned on will be described. In this power-on process (FIGS. 15 and 16), first, interrupts are disabled so that interrupt processing such as timer interrupts is not executed (S1), the stack pointer in the area is set (S2), and the built-in WDT (Watchdog Timer) is set. At the same time as starting up (S3), the firing control signal output port is cleared (S4).

Next, a startup wait process (S5 to S8) for the sub control board 123a is executed. That is, a value corresponding to the sub-board startup waiting time (for example, 2 seconds) is set in a predetermined register (S5), and the subtraction process (S6) is performed until the value becomes 0, that is, until the sub-board startup waiting time elapses. ) and the WDT clearing process (S7) are repeatedly executed.

When the sub-board activation waiting time has elapsed (S8:=0), a power abnormality signal monitoring process (S9 to S11) is executed, which waits until the power abnormality signal turns OFF. That is, the power abnormality signal outputted from the power supply board 129a is read twice (S9), and it is determined whether the levels of the two times the power abnormality signals match (S10). If the levels do not match (S10: No), the process returns to S9; even if they do match (S10: Yes), if the power abnormality signal is ON (S11: Yes), the process returns to S9. (S11).

When the power abnormality signal is turned off (S11: No), the RAM protection and prohibited area are invalidated (S12), and the initial setting of the work area is executed (S13). Here, for example, the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared and the system operation status is set to the initial value 01H. Furthermore, a standby screen display command (BA08H) is transmitted to the sub-control board 123a (S14). When the sub control board 123a receives the standby screen display command (BA08H), a message such as "Please Wait" is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 106, for example. Then, the payout control board 130a normally starts up and waits while clearing the WDT until the power-on signal from the payout control board 130a is turned ON (S15, S16).

Subsequently, the process moves to steps S17 to S44. The processing of S17 to S44 includes "setting change" which executes the setting change process (S20) and RAM clearing process (S21 to S24), and RAM clearing process (S21 to S24) without executing the setting change process (S20). "RAM clear" to execute "RAM clear", "Setting confirmation" to execute setting confirmation processing (S33 to S40) and backup restoration processing (S41), backup restoration processing (S41) without executing setting confirmation processing (S33 to S40) This process is performed in one of five processing modes: ``backup restoration'', which executes the process, and ``RAM abnormality'', which executes the power re-on wait process (S27 to S29).

In addition, among these five types of processing modes, four types excluding "RAM abnormality" are the ON/OFF state of the setting key switch 133, the ON/OFF state of the RAM clear switch 132, and the opening of the door (front frame 3). /Selected according to the combination of closed states.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, when both the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are ON, "Change settings" is selected in principle; is OFF, "RAM clear" is selected, but even if the setting key switch 133 and RAM clear switch 132 are both ON, "RAM clear" is selected instead of "setting change" when the door is closed. is now selected. Similarly, when the RAM clear switch 132 is OFF and the setting key switch 133 is ON, "Confirm settings" is selected in principle, and when both the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are OFF, "Backup" is selected. "Return" is selected, but even if the RAM clear switch 132 is OFF and the setting key switch 133 is ON, "Backup return" is selected instead of "Confirm settings" when the door is closed. There is.

As described above, in this embodiment, a situation in which the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are ON even though the door (front frame 3) is not open may indicate fraudulent activity, so the setting change function is Regarding "Setting change" and "Setting confirmation", the condition is that the door is opened, and if the door is closed, the "RAM clear" without executing the setting change process (S20) and the setting confirmation process (S33 to S40) are not executed. You will now be able to select "Backup Restore". Note that for "RAM clear" and "backup restoration" which are not related to the setting change function, only the ON/OFF states of the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 are required, and the open/closed state of the door is not a condition.

In S17 and S18, the level data regarding each signal of the RAM clear switch 132 and the setting key switch 133 is acquired and saved to the work area (S17), and each signal of the door open switch 84, RAM clear switch 132, and setting key switch 133 is acquired. (hereinafter referred to as door open signal, RAM clear switch signal, setting key switch signal) is acquired (S18).

Then, based on these three signals, it is determined whether "setting change" is selected as the processing mode (S19). That is, if the door open signal, RAM clear switch signal, and setting key switch signal are all ON (S19: Yes), the process moves to the setting change process (S20) (see FIG. 14).

In the setting change process (S20), as shown in FIG. 17, first, a setting change start command (BA76H) indicating that the setting change period has started is transmitted (S51). When the sub control board 123a receives the setting change start command (BA76H), for example, a message such as "settings changing" is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 106.

Next, the backup flag is cleared (S52). This is so that if a power outage occurs during the setting change period, a backup abnormality will be determined in S26 (FIG. 16), which will be described later, the next time the power is turned on. Furthermore, the system operation status is set to 02H (S53). Note that the initial value of the system operation status is 01H (see S13 in FIG. 15).

Subsequently, the setting value data is read from the setting value work area of the RAM and set in, for example, the W register as the setting work value (S54). In this embodiment, any one of settings 1 to 6 can be selected as a setting value, and the setting value work area on the RAM contains any one of 0 to 5 depending on the setting value (any one of settings 1 to 6). The setting value data is stored. Therefore, if the value of the set value work area is normal, the set work value of the W register will be any one of 0 to 5.

Next, the setting work value of the W register is compared with the setting maximum value (5 in this case) (S55), and if the setting work value is larger than the setting maximum value (S56: Yes), the setting work value of the W register is is set to 0 (S57). Thereby, if there is an abnormality in the setting value data, the setting work value can be forcibly set to 0, which corresponds to setting 1.

Subsequently, the security signal output from the external output terminal is set to ON (S58), and the output to the LED common port is cleared (S59). Then, the display pattern data corresponding to the setting work value (value of the W register) at that time is output to the LED data port 1 (see FIG. 13) (S60), and the display pattern data is displayed on the 7-segment display section 137d (setting display means 134). The corresponding LED common port is set to ON (S61). As a result, one of "1" to "6" is displayed on the 7-segment display section 137d depending on the setting work value (0 to 5) at that time.

Furthermore, a 4 ms wait process (S62) is executed to provide a 4 ms waiting time. In order to create the edge data of the RAM clear switch signal and the setting key switch signal in S64, which will be described later, a waiting time of 4 ms is provided here to check whether there is a change in each signal.

Subsequently, a power abnormality check process (S63) is executed. In this power supply abnormality check process (S63), as shown in FIG. 18, first, the power supply abnormality signal transmitted from the power supply board 129a is read twice (S71). Then, it is determined whether the levels of the power abnormality signals read twice match (S72), and if the levels do not match (S72: No), the process returns to S71, and if they match (S72: Yes) ), it is determined whether the power supply abnormality signal is ON (S73). If the power abnormality signal is not ON (normal) (S73: No), the value of the power abnormality confirmation counter is cleared (S74), and the power abnormality check process is ended.

On the other hand, if the power abnormality signal is ON (S73: Yes), the value of the power abnormality confirmation counter is incremented (S75), and the value of the power abnormality confirmation counter after the increment reaches, for example, 2 or not. is determined (S76). If the value of the power abnormality confirmation counter is less than 2 (S76: No), the power abnormality check process is directly ended.

If the value of the power abnormality confirmation counter has reached 2 in S76 (S76: Yes), it is determined that there is a power abnormality, and a power off command (BA33H, BA55H) is sent (S77), and the setting change process is not in progress. Under this condition, the backup flag is set to ON (=AA55H) (S78, S79). As a result, if a power outage occurs during the setting change process, the backup flag remains OFF (=0000H). Note that whether or not the setting change process is in progress can be determined based on the system operation status.

Then, the RAM protection is enabled and the prohibited area is disabled (S80). As a result, data writing to the RAM is prohibited in subsequent processing. Also, after clearing the output ports such as external terminal ports, sub ports, solenoid ports, LED common ports, and LED data ports (S81) and disabling timer interrupts (S82), repeating infinite loop processing while clearing the WDT, Wait until the power supply voltage drops and the CPU becomes inactive (S83).

Returning to the setting change process in FIG. 17, the explanation will be continued. Following the power supply abnormality check process (S63), edge data of the RAM clear switch signal and the setting key switch signal is created (S64), and the edge data of the setting key switch signal is determined to determine whether the setting change termination condition is satisfied, that is, the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal. is detected (S65), and if the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal is not detected (S65: No), it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed, that is, the ON edge of the RAM clear switch signal is detected (S66). In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 132 is also used for setting change operations, and in S66, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed when the ON edge of the RAM clear switch signal is detected. ing.

If the ON edge of the RAM clear switch signal is detected in S66 (S66: Yes), the setting work value of the W register is incremented (S67) and the process moves to S55. In S55 to S57, if the set work value after incrementing is larger than the maximum setting value of 5, the set work value is updated to 0. In this way, in this embodiment, by executing the setting work value change processing of S55 to S57 every time a setting change operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 132) is performed during the setting change period, The setting work value is changed cyclically within the range of 0 to 5.

Following the processing from S55 to S57, processing from S58 onwards is performed. Further, if the ON edge of the RAM clear switch signal is not detected in S66 (S66: No), the processes from S58 onwards are performed. Since the processing of S58 to S64 has already been explained, the explanation will be omitted here, but as a result of this processing, the display on the setting display means 134 changes in accordance with the change in the setting work value.

As described above, in the setting change process shown in FIG. 17, as long as the setting key switch 133 is ON, the processes of S55 to S64 are executed when the setting change operation is performed using the RAM clear switch 132, and the settings change operation is If not, the processes of S58 to S64 are repeatedly executed. Then, when the setting key switch 133 is switched from ON to OFF and the setting change end condition is satisfied (S65: Yes), the setting change period is ended and the setting work value of the W register is stored in the setting value work area. (S68). As a result, the temporary setting work value changed by operating the RAM clear switch 132 during the setting change period is determined as the setting value data.

Subsequently, a setting confirmation display indicating confirmation of the setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 137d (setting display means 134) (S69). In this setting confirmation display, one of "1." to "6." is displayed corresponding to the confirmed setting value data (any one of 0 to 5). That is, by adding ". (dot)" to "1" to "6" without dots that had been displayed up to that point, it is notified that the set value has been finalized. In addition, to display the setting confirmation on the 7-segment display section 137d (setting display means 134), turn on the LED common port corresponding to the 7-segment display section 137d, and display "1." to "" according to the confirmed setting value. 6.'' is performed by outputting display pattern data indicating either one of them to the LED data port 1 (see FIG. 13).

Furthermore, a settings change end command indicating that the settings change period has ended is transmitted (S70), and the settings change process is ended. This setting change end command reflects the determined setting value data, and one of the setting change end commands BA70H to BA75H is sent depending on the setting value data.

The explanation will be continued by returning to the power-on processing in FIGS. 15 and 16. When the setting change process (S20) is completed, the process moves to the RAM clear process (S21 to S24). That is, first, a specific range of the work area (intra-area RAM) within the area is initialized (S21), and initial values (30 seconds) are set for the RAM clear notification timer and security signal timer, respectively (S22, S23), An initial value is set in a part of the RAM (S24).

When the above RAM clear processing (S21 to S24) is completed, the process moves to common processing (S42 to S44) that is commonly performed in four types of processing modes except for "RAM abnormality". In this common processing, various command transmission processing (S42), gaming state notification information updating processing (S43), internal register initialization processing (S44), etc. are performed. In the command sending process of S42, first, an initialize command (BA01H) is sent, and in the case of "setting change" or "RAM clear", a RAM clear command (BA02H) etc. is sent, and then "setting confirmation" or "backup restoration" is sent. In this case, the first and second special reservation quantity designation commands (B0xxH, B1xxH) based on the values of the first and second special reservation quantities, the setting value command (F6xxH) based on the setting value data, and the state specification based on the gaming state Send commands (FAxxH to FDxxH), etc.

Further, in the internal register initialization process (S44), for example, the system operation status is set to 00H and the firing control signal is set to ON. This makes it possible for the firing means 17 to fire the game ball.

Returning to S19 in FIG. 15, the explanation will be continued. If at least one of the door open signal, RAM clear switch signal, and setting key switch signal is not ON in S19 (S19: No), the process moves to RAM abnormality determination processing (S25). In this RAM abnormality determination process (S25), setting value data is acquired from the setting value work area of the in-area RAM, and the setting value data is compared with the setting maximum value (here, 5 corresponding to setting 6). If the set value data is larger than the maximum set value (S25: No), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the process moves to a power-on wait process (S27 to S29).

If the RAM is not abnormal (S25: Yes), the process moves to backup abnormality determination processing (S26). In this backup abnormality determination process (S26), it is determined whether the backup flag is normal (ON), and if it is not normal (S26: No), it is determined that there is a backup abnormality and the power is turned on again. The process moves to S29).

As described above, if the backup flag is cleared (S52) in the setting change process (FIG. 17) and a power abnormality is detected in the power supply abnormality check process (FIG. 18), the backup flag is cleared only when the setting change process is not in progress. is set to ON (=AA55H), so if a power outage occurs during the setting change period, the backup abnormality determination process (S26) will determine that there is a backup abnormality the next time the power is turned on. , a power re-on wait process (S27 to S29) is executed.

In the power restart waiting process (S27 to S29), first a RAM error command (BA7FH) is transmitted (S27). When the sub control board 123a receives the RAM error command (BA7FH), a message such as "RAM error, please turn on the power again and set the setting to 1" is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 106, for example.

Then, an error display (S28) on the 7-segment display unit 137d (setting display means 134) and a power abnormality check process (S29) are repeated indefinitely, and the system enters a power-on waiting state. The error display in S28 is performed by turning on the LED common port corresponding to the 7-segment display section 137d and outputting the display pattern data corresponding to "E" to the LED data port 1 (see FIG. 13). be exposed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a RAM abnormality or a backup abnormality, the system is configured to forcibly turn on the power again by transitioning to the power-on waiting state. In addition, if the power-on wait process (S27 to S29) is executed due to a RAM error, and at least one of the door open signal, RAM clear switch signal, and setting key switch signal is not ON in S19 when the power is turned on again. Then, it is again determined that there is a RAM abnormality or a backup abnormality, and the power-on restart waiting process (S27 to S29) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on again after waiting for the power to be turned on again, the setting change process (S20 ) and set the setting value to any value from settings 1 to 6. Of course, in this case, even if the set value is not set to any value among settings 1 to 6 by operating the RAM clear switch 132, if the set value is abnormal, the set value is changed to set 1 to the set work value in S55 to S57. Since the corresponding 0 is forcibly set, after executing the setting change process, the setting key switch 133 is switched from ON to OFF without setting the setting value to any value among settings 1 to 6. As a result, the setting change end condition is satisfied (S65: Yes), the setting change period is ended, and the setting work value of the W register is stored in the setting value work area, thereby making it possible to recover from the RAM abnormal state.

Returning to S25 and S26, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in S25 and S26 that there is neither a RAM abnormality nor a backup abnormality, the process moves to RAM clear branch determination processing (S30). This RAM clear branch determination process (S30) is to determine whether or not to select the "RAM clear" processing mode. If the RAM clear switch signal is ON (S30: Yes), "RAM clear" is selected. Once the processing mode is selected, the process moves to the RAM clear process (S21 to S24) (see FIG. 14), and if the RAM clear switch signal is not ON (S30: No), the process moves to the setting confirmation branch judgment process (S31, S32). do. The RAM clearing process (S21 to S24) has already been described.

Setting confirmation branch determination processing (S31, S32) is to determine which processing mode to select, "setting confirmation" or "backup restoration", and acquires a door open signal and a setting key switch signal (S31). ), if both of those signals are ON (S32: Yes), the "setting confirmation" processing mode is selected and the process moves to the setting confirmation processing (S33 to S40); otherwise (S32: No), The "backup restoration" processing mode is selected, the setting confirmation processing (S33 to S40) is skipped, and the process moves to the backup restoration processing (S41) (see FIG. 14).

In the setting confirmation process (S33 to S40), first, a setting value command indicating that a setting confirmation period has started is transmitted (S33). The setting value data is reflected in this setting value command, and one of the setting value commands BA60H to BA65H is transmitted depending on the setting value data. When the sub control board 123a receives the setting value command (BA6xH), for example, a message such as "Setting confirmation in progress" is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 106.

Further, the security signal timer is set to an initial value (30 seconds) (S34), and the security signal output from the external output terminal is set to ON (S35). Here, the subtraction of the security signal timer is executed in the timer management process (S93) of the 4ms timer interrupt process. That is, during the setting confirmation process, the security signal is always ON and output from the external output terminal, and even after the setting confirmation process is finished, the security signal is output from the external output terminal for 30 seconds. Then, a setting value display process (S36) is executed to display the setting value on the 7-segment display section 137d (setting display means 134). This setting value display processing (S36) turns ON the LED common port corresponding to the 7-segment display section 137d, and displays display pattern data indicating any of "1." to "6." according to the setting value. This is done by outputting to LED data port 1 (see FIG. 13).

Further, a 4 ms wait process (S37) for providing a 4 ms waiting time is executed, and then a power abnormality check process (S38) is executed. The 4 ms wait process (S37) and the power abnormality check process (S38) are the same as the 4 ms wait process (S62) and the power abnormality check process (S63) of the setting change process (FIG. 17) described above.

Next, edge data of the setting key switch signal is created (S39), and it is determined whether the setting confirmation end condition is satisfied, that is, whether the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal is detected (S40). Then, the processes of S35 to S39 are repeatedly executed until the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal is detected in S40.

If the OFF edge of the setting key switch signal is detected in S40 (S40: Yes), the setting confirmation period ends and the process moves to backup recovery processing (S41). In the backup restoration process (S41), some areas of the in-area RAM, such as the backup flag work area and the error-related work area, are initialized. After the backup restoration process (S41), the process shifts to the above-mentioned common process (S42 to S44).

When the above processing of S17 to S44 is completed, the process moves to the main loop processing (S45 to S48). In this main loop process, a series of processes are repeatedly executed, including disabling interrupts (S45), updating various random numbers (S46), executing performance display monitor processing (S47), and then allowing interrupts (S48). do. As a result, timer interrupt processing is called and executed at a cycle of, for example, 4 ms.

Here, the performance display monitor processing (S47) is to calculate the base value to be displayed on the performance display means 135, and during the unit measurement period until the number of outs reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60,000), the unit A real-time base value is calculated by counting the "number of safes in a low probability state" and "the number of outs in a low probability state" during the measurement period, and dividing the former by the latter. It is necessary to always count the "number of safes in low probability state" and "number of outs in low probability state", but the process of calculating the base value based on these values depends on the display timing. You can do it accordingly. Furthermore, when the unit measurement period ends, the real-time base value at that point becomes the new first cumulative base value, and the first and second cumulative base values up until then become the new second and third cumulative base values, respectively. Become.

Next, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19) of the main control board 122a will be explained. In this timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), first, a power supply abnormality check process (S91) is executed. This power abnormality check process (S91) is common to the power abnormality check process shown in FIG. 18, which has already been described.

Following the power supply abnormality check process (S91), input management process (S92), timer management process (S93), timer interrupt internal random number management process (S94), error management process (S95), prize ball management process (S96) ).

The input management process (S92) is to manage the detection information by various sensors such as the game ball detection means and the operation means provided in each prize winning means, and creates input data based on the detection information from the various sensors and stores it. do. Further, here, the winning means by which the game ball has won is grasped based on the input data regarding the winning detection information, and the value of the winning counter corresponding to each winning means is updated.

Further, the timer management process (S93) is for managing timers used for game control, and is designed to decrement the values of various timers one by one until they reach zero. The types of timers handled in this timer management process include the RAM clear notification timer and security signal timer mentioned above, as well as normal symbol timers, ordinary electric accessory timers, special symbol timers, and special electric accessory timers. , a magnetic error notification timer, a radio error notification timer, a winning slot error notification timer, a normal electric accessory prize activation timer, a normal electric accessory operating timer for test signals, etc.

Also, the timer interrupt random number management process (S94) is to manage the random numbers related to each symbol variation, and includes the process of updating each random number counter (addition by 1) and the process of changing the start value of the random number counter every cycle. and do it.

The error management process (S95) is to manage various errors, and monitors the occurrence of errors based on input data from various sensors and status signals from the payout control board 130a, and if an error occurs, , sends an error command to the sub-control board 123a, and executes other error processing.

In addition, the prize ball management process (S96) is to manage prize balls, and checks the winning counter managed in the input management process (S92), and if there is a prize, specifies the number of prize balls. A payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 130a. The payout control board 130a that has received the payout control command controls the payout means 32 to execute a payout operation for the specified number of prize balls based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command.

Following the prize ball management process (S96), a normal symbol management process (S97), a normal electric accessory management process (S98), a special symbol management process (S99), and a special electric accessory management process (S100) are executed. .

The normal symbol management process (S97) is to manage the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display means 91, and based on the detection of the game ball by the normal symbol starting means 101, ordinary random number information such as a random number value for determining a hit is generated. At the same time, the normal random number information is stored in a first-in, first-out storage area up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4 pieces), and the normal symbol display means 91 is in a state where it can fluctuately display, and one or more pieces are displayed. On the condition that the normal random number information is stored (the number of normally reserved items is 1 or more), the first hit judgment random value is extracted from the normal random number information queue, and the hit judgment random value is predetermined. A hit/miss determination (hit determination) is performed depending on whether or not it matches the hit determination value, and based on the hit determination result, the stop symbol and the fluctuation time after the normal symbol change are selected, and the normal symbol The display means 91 is used to change the normal symbols.

In addition, the normal electric accessory management process (S98) is to manage the normal profit state that releases the second special symbol starting means 103, and the normal symbol display means 91 is controlled based on the hit determination result of S97 being a hit. A normal electric accessory that drives the opening/closing part 118 of the second special symbol starting means 103 so as to change the opening/closing part 118 of the second special symbol starting means 103 to an open state according to a predetermined opening/closing pattern when the stopped symbol after the change becomes a winning state. Setting processing of solenoid control data for the solenoid is performed.

The special symbol management process (S99) is to manage the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols by the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94, and the first and second special symbol starting means 102 and 103 are Based on the detection of the game ball, first and second special random number information consisting of a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number, and other random numbers are obtained, and the first and second special random number information are predetermined. The upper limit reserved number (for example, 4 each) is stored in a first-in, first-out storage area, and when the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 are in a state where they can be displayed in a variable manner, the second special If the number of reserved pieces is 1 or more, extract the first jackpot judgment random number value from the queue of second special random number information, and if only the first special number of reserved pieces is 1 or more, extract the first jackpot judgment random number value from the queue of first special random number information, Jackpot determination processing that determines jackpot/loss by random number lottery using the jackpot determination random numbers (random number lottery processing regarding whether or not to generate first and second special profit states (profit states) advantageous to the player) At the same time, the stopping pattern mode of the first and second special symbols, the variation pattern of the production symbol, etc. are determined according to the jackpot determination result, and the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 , the second special symbol changes.

Further, in the special symbol management process, a pre-reading determination process can be executed. This pre-reading determination process is performed on the first and second special random number information obtained when a game ball enters the first and second special symbol starting means 102 and 103, using a predetermined number before being used for symbol variation. At the timing, for example, when acquiring the first and second special random number information, a pre-read determination is made regarding the jackpot determination random values, etc. included in the first and second special random number information. Note that the main control board 122a functions as a prefetch determination means by executing this prefetch determination process.

For example, when the first and second special reserved numbers increase, a pending addition command according to the pre-read judgment result is sent to the sub-control board 123a, and when starting the variation of the first and second special symbols, , a pending subtraction command, a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and a stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol are sent to the sub-control board 123a, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern from the start of fluctuation of the first and second special symbols is transmitted. When the variation of the first and second special symbols is stopped after the elapse of time, a variation stop command is sent to the sub-control board 123a. Further, when the variation of the first and second special symbols is completed and the first and second special pending numbers are both 0 at that point, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the sub control board 123a.

Here, there are two types of jackpot probabilities, low probability and high probability, and the high probability is set during the variable probability state among the special game states to be described later, and the low probability is set other than that. Further, in this embodiment, the setting value can be changed to six levels from settings 1 to 6, and the jackpot probability (low probability and high probability) changes to six levels according to the setting value. For example, the larger the setting value is, the higher the jackpot probability is.

In addition, the variation patterns of the production pattern 120 include a normal variation pattern in which the ready-to-win state is not established and the winning state occurs, and a reach-out/jackpot variation pattern in which the ready-to-win state is passed and the winning state or jackpot state occurs. For example, a plurality of types of normal variation patterns with different variation times are provided. Regarding reach off/jackpot variation patterns, there are different types such as a normal reach off/jackpot variation pattern in which the reach effect ends with a normal reach effect after a reach is established, and a super reach off/jackpot variation pattern in which the normal reach effect transitions to a super reach effect. Furthermore, there are multiple types of reach variation patterns with different variation times and performance contents for each type of reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the special symbol management process, when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, the jackpot is selected from among a plurality of types such as normal 4R, probability variable 6R, etc. based on the jackpot symbol random number value etc. A plurality of types of jackpots are provided depending on, for example, the type of jackpot game (type of opening pattern), the type of special game state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game, etc. For example, "Normal 4R" is a jackpot that generates a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game based on the opening pattern of 4R, and the production pattern 120 is a normal jackpot mode consisting of even numbered symbols, for example, and during the jackpot game, for example, balls are released. There will be 4 rounds. For example, "Probability Variable 6R" is a jackpot that will generate a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game based on the opening pattern of 6R, and the production pattern 120 will be a variable probability jackpot mode consisting of, for example, odd numbered symbols. There are six rounds of dovetails.

During the time saving state, for example, the fluctuation time of the first and second special symbol display means 93, 94 for the first and second special symbols is switched to a shortened fluctuation time that is shorter than the normal fluctuation time, and the winning probability is changed for the normal symbol. changes from normal probability to high probability, the variation time changes from normal variation time to shortened variation time, and the opening/closing pattern of the second special symbol starting means 103 in the normal profit state changes from the normal opening/closing pattern (for example, 0.2 seconds x 1 opening). It is possible to switch to a special opening/closing pattern (for example, opening for 2 seconds x 3 times). The time saving state starts when the jackpot game ends, and ends when, for example, the first and second special symbols change a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) or the next jackpot game occurs before then.

In addition, during the variable probability state, for example, in addition to the same switching as in the time saving state, the jackpot probability is switched from a low probability to a high probability. Note that the variable probability state starts when the jackpot game ends, and ends, for example, when the next jackpot game occurs.

Next, the specific processing procedure of the jackpot determination process in the special symbol management process (S99) will be explained based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 20 and the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 21(a). In this jackpot determination process, if the acquired jackpot determination random number value is within a predetermined range defined in the jackpot determination table, the game is won. In addition, the main control board 122a functions as a determination means for determining whether or not a profit state is generated by executing this jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20), a jackpot determination random number is first obtained (S111), and depending on whether the special symbol that starts variation is the first or second special symbol, the jackpot corresponding to the special symbol is determined. The address of the determination table is acquired (S112). Here, since the jackpot probability is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if there is no small hit or if the small hit probability is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, , a common jackpot determination table may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this embodiment, a pachinko machine with no small wins is illustrated, but this jackpot determination process will be explained using the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 21(a) when there is a small win.

The jackpot judgment table shown in FIG. 21(a) includes "lower limit of jackpot judgment value" (lower limit information), "upper limit of jackpot judgment value at low accuracy" (upper limit information), and "jackpot judgment value at high accuracy. ' (upper limit information), 'lower limit of small hit judgment value' (lower limit information), 'upper limit of small hit judgment value' (upper limit information), 'upper limit of jackpot judgment random number'. It is composed of first to sixth information groups for specifying the type of range defining information. In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine that does not have a small win, the fourth and fifth information groups regarding the small win determination value may be omitted.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), each of these information groups includes first information indicating whether the judgment value is different for each setting value (any of settings 1 to 6), and a range It is composed of second information indicating regulation information, and third information indicating the values of the jackpot flag (low accuracy/high accuracy) and small hit flag.

The first information is set to 01H if the determination value is different for each set value, and 00H if not. Further, the value of the above-mentioned range regulation information is set in the second information, but the number of this second information differs depending on the first information, for example, if the first information is 00H, the second information (Range definition information) is one, and if the first information is 01H, the second information is provided for the number of types of setting values (here, six types). Further, in the third information, either 00H/5AH is set for each of the low-accuracy jackpot flag, the high-accuracy jackpot flag, and the small hit flag.

In addition, the second information (lower limit information) in the first information group that defines the "lower limit of the jackpot judgment value" is not the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value as it is, but a value obtained by subtracting 1 from that value. ing. Similarly, the second information (lower limit information) in the fourth information group that defines the "lower limit of the small hit judgment value" is not the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value as it is, but the value obtained by subtracting 1 from that value. It is set.

FIG. 22 shows the distribution of determination values in the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 21(a), with FIG. 22(a) illustrating the case of setting 1 and FIG. 22(b) illustrating the case of setting 6. ing. The only difference between setting 1 and setting 6 is the upper limit for low-accuracy jackpots and the upper limit for high-accuracy jackpots, and both are larger in setting 6 than in setting 1. .

Following S112, from the jackpot determination table, first information indicating whether or not the determination value is different for each set value is obtained (S113), and the address is set to the first address of the second information in which the next determination value is stored. Change (S114). Then, it is determined whether the acquired first information is 00H (S115), and if the first information is 00H (S115:=0), range regulation information (second information) is acquired from the current address. However, if the first information is not 00H (S115:≠0), the set value data (any of 0 to 5) is obtained (S116), and the address is changed by offsetting the set value data. After that (S117), range definition information (second information) is acquired from that address (S118).

In the case of the first information group of the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 21(a), the first information is 00H and the second information is the only one common to all setting values, so S116 and S117 are skipped. In S118, this one piece of second information (the lower limit of the jackpot determination value - 1) is acquired. In the case of the second information group, the first information is 01H and the second information (upper limit information) is provided in six types corresponding to settings 1 to 6 (specific range regulation information), so it is acquired in S116. Offset the set value data (0 to 5), and for example, if setting is 1, offset = 0 to obtain the first second information, and if setting is 6, offset = 5 to obtain the sixth second information. (S117, S118).

When the second information (range definition information) is acquired in S118, the value of the second information is compared with the jackpot determination random value acquired in S111 (S119, S120). Then, until it is determined in S120 that the jackpot determination random value is less than or equal to the value of the second information (S120: Yes), the processes of S113 to S120 described above are sequentially executed for each information group in the jackpot determination table. .

While repeating the processing from S113 to S120, if it is determined in S120 that the jackpot determination random number is less than or equal to the value of the second information (S120: Yes), the third information in the information group, that is, the low probability jackpot flag , obtains each value of the high-accuracy jackpot flag and the small-hit flag (S121), and ends the jackpot determination process.

When using the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 21(a), for example, if the jackpot determination random value is 9000, the jackpot determination random value (9000) is changed to the second information (here 10000) in S120 targeting the first information group. ) or less. That is, since the jackpot judgment random value is smaller than the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, the jackpot judgment result is a failure (see FIGS. 22(a) and (b)), and in S121, the jackpot flag for low accuracy and the jackpot flag for high accuracy are set. 00H is set to both the jackpot flag and the small win flag.

For example, if the jackpot judgment random number value is 11700 and the setting value is 6 (setting 6), the jackpot judgment random number value (11700) is set to the second information (here setting 6) in S120 targeting the third information group. 12000) or less. That is, since the jackpot determination random number value is greater than the lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and less than the high-accuracy upper limit value, the jackpot determination result becomes a high-accuracy jackpot (see FIG. 22(b)), and the high-accuracy condition is determined in S121. 5AH is set in the jackpot flag, and 00H is set in the low probability jackpot flag and small hit flag, respectively.

Further, for example, if the jackpot determination random number value is 19000, in S120 targeting the fourth information group, the jackpot determination random number value (19000) is determined to be less than or equal to the second information (here, 20000). In other words, the jackpot judgment random value is larger than the high-accuracy upper limit of the jackpot judgment value and smaller than the lower limit of the small hit judgment value, so the jackpot judgment result is a failure (Fig. 22 (a), (b) ), in S121, the low accuracy jackpot flag, the high accuracy jackpot flag, and the small win flag are all set to 00H.

As described above, in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 21(a)) of the present embodiment, specific range regulation information (upper limit of low-accuracy jackpot determination value, high-accuracy jackpot determination value) among a plurality of range regulation information (upper limit value of It is configured.

By the way, although this embodiment exemplifies a pachinko machine in which the setting value can be changed in six stages, the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 20 can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which the setting value is only in one stage. In other words, in this embodiment, the jackpot determination processing program is divided into models that can change the setting value in multiple levels (there are multiple levels of setting values) and models that cannot change the setting value (there is only one level of setting value). can be made common.

When executing the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 20 on a model with only one setting value, the jackpot determination table is configured as shown in FIG. 23, for example. The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 23 (for 1st stage setting) is different from the jackpot determination table (for 6th stage setting) shown in FIG. 21(a) in the contents of the second and third information groups and the sixth information group. The only difference is that a dummy data group is provided after (the shaded area in FIG. 23).

That is, in the second and third information groups of the jackpot determination table (for the first stage of settings) shown in FIG. 23, even though the first information is set to 01H (the determination value is different for each setting value), Only one piece of second information (specific range regulation information) is set. In the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20) of this embodiment, when the first information is 01H (S115:≠0), setting value data (any of 0 to 5) is acquired (S116), and the setting value data is After changing the address as an offset (S117), second information (specific range regulation information) is acquired from that address (S118), but in the case of a pachinko machine with only one setting value, the setting Since the value data is set to 0, in the repeated processing of S113 to S120 targeting the second and third information groups, the first (that is, the only) second information (specific range) is set with offset = 0. regulation information) is acquired (S117, S118), it is possible to normally execute the jackpot determination process.

In addition, in the jackpot determination table (for setting 1 stage) shown in FIG. 23, in order to make the data size the same as the jackpot determination table (for setting 6 stages) shown in FIG. A dummy data group with a data amount (2 bytes x 5 x 2) corresponding to the second information corresponding to settings 2 to 6 omitted in the second and third information groups is provided.

Regarding the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 23, even if the first information of the second and third information groups is changed to 00H, the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20) will be executed normally and the determination result will not change. . However, in this case, there is a problem that S116 and S117 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20) are not executed at all (an unused program exists). In other words, in this case, even if it appears that a common jackpot determination processing program is used for a model that can change the setting value in multiple stages and a model that can change the setting value in only one stage, Since there are unused programs when used in different models, it cannot be said that the jackpot determination processing program used in both models is substantially the same.

In addition, in the above-mentioned model where the setting value is only one level, only one setting value data such as 0 is stored in the setting value work area of the RAM, but the setting display means 134 (7-segment The display section 137d) not only displays setting information corresponding to the setting value data but also displays errors such as "E". In this way, since information other than the setting information can be displayed on the setting display means 134, it is possible to confirm whether the setting display means 134 is operating normally.

The special electric accessory management process (S100) is to manage a jackpot game in which the jackpot winning means 104 is opened, and when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot and the first and second special symbol display means 93, 94 are changed. Solenoid control for the big winning opening solenoid that drives the opening/closing plate 119 so that the opening/closing plate 119 of the big winning means 104 changes to the open state according to a predetermined opening pattern when the stopped symbol becomes a jackpot mode (specific mode). It is designed to set up the data for use. In addition, the main control board 122a functions as a profit state generating means for generating a jackpot game (profit state) by executing this special electric accessory management process (S100).

Following the special electric accessory management process (S100), the right-handed hitting notification information management process (S101) performs the processing necessary to perform right-handed hitting notification, etc. The right-handed hitting notification is to notify that there is a so-called right-handed hitting advantageous period (for example, during a jackpot game and during a special game state) in which right-handed hitting is advantageous for the player. Of course, in addition to the right-handed game notification, it may also be possible to execute a left-handed game notification that informs the player that it is a left-handed game advantageous period in which left-handed game is advantageous for the player.

Next, LED management processing (S102) is performed. This LED management process (S102) is to manage the light emission of the LEDs constituting the game information display means 90, performance display means 135 (performance information display means 137), etc. As shown in FIG. and clears the LED data port (S131), and updates (increments) the LED output counter (S132). Then, common data corresponding to the value of the LED output counter is selected from the LED common output selection table (FIG. 25) (S133), and the common data is output to the LED common port (S134).

In the LED common output selection table of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 13, first common data turns on common C0 and common C4, and second common data turns on common C1 and common C5. Four types of common data are set: data, third common data that turns on common C2 and common C6, and fourth common data that turns on common C3 and common C7. The four common data are selected cyclically in that order as the LED output counter increases.

As a result, the lighting targets of the game information display means 90 change sequentially like LED groups 90a → 90b → 90c → 90d → 90a → . The lighting targets of the performance information display means 137) change sequentially as 7-segment display sections 137a→137b→137c→137d→137a→... In this manner, in this embodiment, common data is output to the commons C0 to C3 for the game information display means 90 and the commons C4 to C7 for the performance display means 135 at the same time. However, regarding the performance display means 135, this LED management process only outputs common data, and the output of LED data to the LED data port 1 connected to the performance display means 135 is performed in the later out-of-use area processing (S105). ).

Subsequently, LED data for the game information display means 90 corresponding to the selected LED common is created (S135). That is, LED data for any one of the LED groups 90a to 90d of the game information display means 90 is created corresponding to any one of the commons C0 to C3 (FIG. 25). Then, the LED data is outputted to the selected LED data port (in this case, LED data port 0 connected to the game information display means 90) (S136), and the LED management process is ended. Thereby, the four LED groups 90a to 90d of the game information display means 90 can be turned on while being sequentially switched every 4 ms.

Following the above LED management process (S102), external terminal management process (S103) and solenoid management process (S104) are performed. In the external terminal management process (S103), the operating state information of the pachinko machine is outputted to an external device such as a hall computer via an external output terminal provided on the back side of the front frame 3. In addition, in the solenoid management process (S104), based on the solenoid control data set in the normal electric accessory management process (S98) and the special electric accessory management process (S100), the normal electric accessory solenoid and the grand prize opening solenoid are Controls the output of excitation signals.

Subsequently, processing outside the used area (S105) is performed. In the out-of-use area processing (S105), as shown in FIG. 26, first all registers are saved to the stack (S141), the stack pointer for normal processing is saved (S142), and the stack for out-of-use area is saved to the stack pointer. A pointer address is set (S143).

Then, through display content update processing (S144), the display content of the performance display means 135 is updated, and LED data corresponding to the four 7-segment display sections 137a to 137d constituting the performance display means 135 is created. The performance display means 135 first performs an operation confirmation display that repeats all lights on and all lights off for a predetermined operation confirmation time (for example, about 5 seconds), and then calculates in the performance display monitor process (S47 in FIG. 16). A plurality of types of base values (here, four types of real-time base values and first to third cumulative base values) are displayed cyclically at predetermined time intervals (eg, 4.8 seconds).

The four 7-segment display sections 137a to 137d (FIGS. 11 and 13) constituting the performance display means 135 are such that, for example, the upper two digits of the 7-segment display sections 137d and 137c indicate the type of base value (real-time base value, first to The identification display section that shows the third cumulative base value, etc., and the 7-segment display sections 137b and 137a of the lower two digits serve as numerical display sections that display the numerical value of the base value, etc.

The base value is measured in each unit measurement period until the number of out items reaches a predetermined number (60,000 in this case), but the first unit measurement period after the first power is turned on is It does not start from , but starts after a predetermined pre-measurement period has elapsed (for example, when the number of outs reaches a predetermined number (here, 300)).

During the real-time base value display period, the identification display section displays, for example, "bL." indicating the real-time base value, and the numerical display section displays, for example, the real-time base value at the start of the real-time base value display period or immediately before that. However, depending on whether or not the number of out items in the unit measurement period at that time has reached a predetermined threshold value (for example, 6000 items), the display mode of "bL." on the identification display section is changed, for example, between lighting and blinking. It looks like this. Note that the base value is displayed on the numerical display after rounding to the first decimal place, but if the value after rounding is 3 digits or more, a symbol such as "99." indicating overflow is displayed on the numerical display. do.

Also, during the display period of the first to third cumulative base values, the identification display section displays, for example, "b1." to "b3." indicating the first to third cumulative base values, and the numerical display section displays the values. The first to third cumulative base values at the time are displayed, but if the first to third cumulative base values have not yet been obtained, for example, "b1." to "b3." on the identification display section are displayed blinking. At the same time, "--" is displayed on the numerical display section. For example, since none of the first to third cumulative base values are obtained until the end of the first unit measurement period after the first power is turned on, the performance display means during the first to third cumulative base value display period The display of 135 becomes "b1.--" to "b3.--".

In addition, during the pre-measurement period before the first unit measurement period starts (when the number of outs is less than 300), the identification display section will display "bL.", "b1." to "b3.", for example, blinking. However, for example, "--" is displayed on the numerical display section.

Following the display content update process (S144), an out-of-use area LED update process (S145) is performed. In this out-of-use area LED update process (S145), as shown in FIG. 27, first, the value of the LED output counter is acquired (S151). This LED output counter is used to select common data in the LED management process of FIG. 24. Then, based on the value of the LED output counter, the common selected in the LED management process (FIG. 24) is selected from the LED data corresponding to the 7-segment display sections 137a to 137d created in the display content update process (S144). Corresponding LED data is selected (S152).

For example, when the common C4 is turned ON in the LED management process, the LED data corresponding to the 7-segment display part 137a is selected, and when the common C7 is turned ON in the LED management process, the 7-segment display part 137a is selected. The LED data corresponding to 137d is selected. In this way, since a common LED output counter is used for the selection of commons C4 to C7 in the LED management process and the selection of LED data in this out-of-use area LED update process, the LED data corresponding to the selected common can be selected easily and reliably, and the program capacity can be reduced.

Then, the LED data selected in S152 is output to the LED data port 1 connected to the performance display means 135 (S153), and the out-of-use area LED update process is ended.

Following the above-mentioned out-of-area LED update process (S145), out-of-area SW detection information storage process (S146) and sight test signal update process (S147) are executed, and then the stack pointer from normal processing is restored ( S148), all registers are restored from the stack (S149), and the out-of-use area processing ends.

Returning to the timer interrupt process in FIG. 19, the explanation will be continued. When the above-described out-of-use area processing (S105) is completed, the WDT is cleared (S106), and the timer interrupt processing is ended.

Next, the control operation of the sub-control board 123a will be explained. The sub-control board 123a includes a liquid crystal display means 106, an illumination means 136, speakers 18, 25, a first frame movable body 26, a second frame movable body 27, an air blower 28, a first panel movable body 107, a second movable panel. As shown in FIG. 12(b), it controls performances by various performance means such as the body 108 and the third movable body 109 of the board, and as shown in FIG. It is provided with a control means 143, a normal preview performance control means 144, a customer waiting control means 145, a volume setting means 146, a light amount setting means 147, and the like.

In addition, the types of effects by various effect means include an image effect that displays images including moving images on the liquid crystal display means 106, etc., a light emission effect using the illumination means 136, a sound effect using sound generation, a rotating body 44, an effect, etc. There is a movable effect using a movable body such as the button 41.

Further, the sound production includes a normal sound production in which sound is output from the speakers 18 and 25 based on audio data, and a specific sound production in which an operation sound is generated by driving a movable body (predetermined part) by a driving means. Here, the volume due to the normal sound production changes as the volume level changes due to the volume adjustment operation described later, but the volume due to the specific sound production does not change even if the volume level changes due to the volume adjustment operation. However, regarding the volume of specific sound effects, if the player can touch the movable body being driven, the volume of the operation sound may change depending on whether the player is touching the movable body or not. There is sex.

In this way, the sub-control board 123a includes display effect execution means that can execute a display effect of displaying images including moving images on the liquid crystal display means (display means) 106, and a display effect execution means that can execute a display effect that displays images including moving images on the liquid crystal display means (display means) 106, and outputs audio from the speakers (audio output means) 18 and 25. and a sound performance execution means capable of executing the sound performance to be output. Note that the video displayed in the display effect is composed of, for example, a plurality of scenes connected together.

The special reservation number display control means 141 controls the display of the first and second special reservation numbers on the liquid crystal display means 106, and corresponds to the increase or decrease in the first and second special reservation numbers. Corresponds to the first reserved images X1 to X4 for the number of pieces (maximum 4), the second reserved images Y1 to Y4 for the second special reserved number (maximum 4), and the changing first and second special symbols. It is configured to display on the liquid crystal display means 106 the pending image Z during fluctuation.

In this embodiment, in order to preferentially digest the pending memory of the second special symbol over the pending memory of the first special symbol, priority is given to the second special symbol side with respect to the pending display, and as shown in FIG. The second pending images Y1 to Y4 are displayed partially overlapping each other in front of the pending images X1 to X4. When a pending addition command regarding the first and second special pending numbers is received from the main control board 122a, one additional first and second pending image X1~, Y1~ is displayed at the end of the queue. In addition, when a hold subtraction command regarding the first and second special hold numbers is received from the main control board 122a, the first and second hold images X1~, Y1~ are moved one by one toward the front of the queue. At the same time as the shifting, the first and second held images X1 and Y1 at the top that have been pushed out are moved to, for example, a predetermined position and changed into a pending image Z during fluctuation. In this embodiment, the display color (display mode) of the first and second pending images X1~, Y1~, and the fluctuating pending image Z is set to, for example, "white" as the default, and when executing the pending change effect described later. The preview effect is changed according to the scenario selected by the pre-read preview effect control means 142.

The pre-read preview performance control means 142 is for controlling the pre-read preview performance. The look-ahead preview performance is based on the look-ahead determination result by the main control board 122a, and determines whether or not the stop symbols after the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols will become the first and second jackpot modes and a jackpot game will occur. Based on the look-ahead judgment result, for example, in the same manner in multiple symbol fluctuations (during the look-ahead zone) up to the symbol change (target fluctuation) corresponding to the special random number information that was the target of the look-ahead judgment. There is a "continuous performance" in which a performance is executed, a "pending change performance" in which the display mode of the first and second pending images X1~, Y1~ is made different (changed) based on a pre-read determination result, and the like.

The symbol variation effect control means 143 controls various effects related to the variable display of the effect image 120, such as image effects, light emission effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and when receiving a variation pattern command from the main control board 122a. Based on the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the specified variation pattern and the preview production scenario selected by the normal notice production control means 144, image production, light emission production, sound production, and movable production regarding the variable display of the production pattern 120 are performed. etc., and when the fluctuation stop command is received, the fluctuation of the effect pattern 120 is stopped with the stop pattern selected based on the stop pattern command and the fluctuation pattern command, and the associated image effect, light emitting effect, It is designed to stop sound effects, movable effects, etc.

The normal preview performance control means 144 is for executing a normal preview performance. The normal notice performance is to foretell whether or not the stopped symbol after the symbol change will be in a jackpot mode during the symbol change based on the jackpot judgment result etc. by the jackpot judgment processing on the main control board 122a side, for example. There are "pseudo-reaction", "SU production", "timer production", "resurrection production", "premier production", "button production", etc.

Here, the "pseudo series" is a production in which the effect pattern 120 is varied multiple times on the liquid crystal display means 106 while the first and second special symbols fluctuate once. For example, the greater the number of variations in the pseudo series, the greater the jackpot. It is set to have high reliability. In addition, "SU effect" is a predetermined effect step including displaying the effect pattern 120 on the liquid crystal display means 106 during fluctuation of the first and second special symbols, for example, in multiple stages (for example, SU1 This is a performance that is executed up to a predetermined stage among the three stages (3 stages - SU3), and is set so that, for example, the higher the stage of the performance step, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. The "timer effect" is, for example, an effect in which a timer image is displayed at a predetermined timing on the liquid crystal display means 106 to measure time (for example, countdown), and for example, it is set so that the longer the time measurement, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. has been done. In addition, a "resurrection performance" is a performance that revives from a state in which a miss etc. is displayed and becomes, for example, a jackpot mode, and a "premier performance" is a performance that has an extremely low appearance rate and when it appears, for example, a probability-variable jackpot is confirmed. In addition, the "button performance" is used to increase the reliability of the jackpot, for example, when it is determined that the operation of the performance button 41 satisfies a predetermined operation condition (operation established) during the valid operation period during the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols. A predetermined post-operation effect is executed depending on the operation.

When the normal notice performance control means 144 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 122a, it collects information obtained from the variation pattern command (here, the jackpot determination result and the variation pattern selection result) and the setting values (settings 1 to 6). Whether or not to execute a lottery regarding the normal preview performance (with/without lottery) is selected based on the normal preview performance selection table. In addition, if you select lottery execution for at least one of the multiple regular preview performances, for example, the jackpot determination result, the setting value (any of settings 1 to 6), and each regular preview performance. One scenario is selected from a plurality of scenarios based on the scenario selection table related to the scenario selection table.

The customer waiting control means 145 controls the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols by the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 after the customer waiting start conditions including reception of the customer waiting command (BA04H) are satisfied. This is to control the production, etc. during the customer waiting state (during the fluctuation stop state where the symbols are not changing) until the customer waiting end condition such as the start of the customer waiting end condition is satisfied.

After the customer waiting state starts, a pre-customer waiting performance is first performed. In this performance before waiting for a customer, the liquid crystal display means 106 continues to display the image of the performance symbol 120 that has been stopped due to the previous symbol change, the illumination means 136 emits light in a predetermined customer waiting light mode, and the speaker 18, From 25 onwards, predetermined BGM is continuously output.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the pre-customer waiting presentation, the transition will be made to the customer waiting presentation.At this time, in addition to fading out the BGM, the liquid crystal display means 106 will display a stopped presentation pattern 120. While continuing to display the image, a menu display operation notification image informs you of the operation method for displaying the menu screen, a volume adjustment operation notification image informs you of the operation method for adjusting the volume, and an operation method for adjusting the light intensity. Starts displaying the light amount adjustment operation notification image, etc. In this way, during the execution of the pre-customer waiting presentation, that is, during the period from the start of the customer waiting state until, for example, 30 seconds have elapsed, even though the menu display operation is possible and the volume/light intensity adjustment operation is possible. , the menu display operation notification image, the volume adjustment operation notification image, and the light amount adjustment operation notification image for reporting this are not displayed.

After that, when the demonstration start condition is satisfied (for example, 180 seconds have passed since the start of the customer waiting state), the customer waiting performance is shifted to the demonstration performance. In the demonstration production, there is a "Model Image Demo" that runs an image movie of the model in question, a "Model Logo" that displays a model logo image that shows the logo of the model in question, and a "Corporate Logo" that displays a company logo image that shows the logo of the manufacturer. '', ``An addictive prevention display'' that displays an addictive prevention display image, etc. are sequentially performed.

After the demonstration performance starts, the customer waits for a predetermined time, for example, until the customer waiting end condition such as the first and second special symbol display means 93 and 94 starting to change the first and second special symbols is satisfied. To repeatedly perform demonstration performances continuously while interposing performances or without intervening customer waiting performances.

The volume setting means (volume level setting means, volume level changing means, first volume level changing means, set volume changing means) 146 sets the volume of the sound (BGM, sound effect, notification sound, etc.) output from the speakers 18 and 25. The level is set or changed in multiple stages, and the hall setting value (instep value) obtained by the volume adjustment knob (instep operation means, second operation means) 140 arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1 , a player setting value (O value) obtained by the volume operation means (O operation means, first operation means) 39 arranged on the front side of the gaming machine main body 1, and a pre-stored volume level setting table. Based on this, the volume level is set in a plurality of stages, for example, in any of eight stages from 0 (silence) to 7 (maximum volume). Note that the volume adjustment by the volume operation means 39 can be performed during a predetermined volume adjustment possible period. Although the volume adjustable period can be arbitrarily set, for example, the volume adjustable period may be all periods except a certain period when the power is turned on.

For example, as shown in FIG. 28, the volume level setting table includes hall setting values in 10 levels from T0 to T9 by the volume adjustment knob 140 and player setting values in 5 levels from M1 to M5 by the volume operating means 39. Corresponding volume level assignments and initial positions of player set values M1 to M5 for each hole set value T0 to T9 are set. Among the hall setting values T0 to T9, hall personnel usually select T3 to T7 for the normal mode and T8 and T9 for the power saving mode. When T8 or T9 for the power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode is turned on, and when the power saving start condition is met, for example, a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the customer waiting state, the light intensity is set to be lower than in the normal mode. The light is controlled to emit light (or may be turned off) in the power saving mode. When T3 to T7 for the normal mode are selected, the power saving mode is turned off.

In the volume level setting table shown in FIG. 28, for the hall setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, the correspondence relationship between the player setting values M1 to M5 and the volume level is the same, but the initial positions are different. . That is, for any of the hall setting values T3 to T7, volume levels 3 to 7 are assigned to the player setting values M1 to M5, respectively, but the initial positions for the hall setting values T3 to T7 are determined by the player setting values, respectively. Values M1 to M5 (ie, volume levels 3 to 7) are set. As described above, regarding the hall setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, the larger the hall setting value is, the higher the initial volume level is.

Regarding the hall setting values T8 and T9 for the power saving mode, the correspondence between the player setting values M1 to M5 and the volume level is the same, but the initial positions are different. That is, for any of the hall setting values T3 to T7, volume levels 3 to 7 are assigned to the player setting values M1 to M5, respectively, as in the case of the hall setting values T3 to T7, but the hall setting values The initial positions for T8 and T9 are set to player setting values M1 and M5 (ie, volume levels 3 and 7), respectively. In this way, regarding the hall setting values T8 and T9 for the power saving mode, the larger the hall setting value is, the higher the initial volume level is.

Also, among the hall setting values T0 to T2 that are not normally selected in a game hall, the hall setting value T0 is for making the sound silent, and the volume level corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M5 is all 0 (silence). It has become. The hall setting value T1 is for presentation purposes; for example, the volume level corresponding to the minimum player setting value M1 is 1, and the volume level corresponding to other player setting values M2 to M5 is the same as the hall setting value T3 etc. The initial position is set to the player setting value M1 (ie, volume level 1). The hall setting value T2 is for factory shipment, for example, the volume level corresponding to the minimum level player setting value M1 is 2, and the volume level corresponding to other player setting values M2 to M5 is the hall setting value T3 etc. They are the same, and the initial position is set to the player setting value M1 (ie, volume level 2). In this way, the initial positions for the hole setting values T0 to T2 are all set to the minimum player setting value M1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the volume level when outputting the error sound is set to the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall setting value at that time (in this case, the player setting value), regardless of the player setting value by the volume operation means 39. The volume level corresponding to M5) is set.

Here, the error sound is a notification sound that is output when a predetermined error occurs. In this embodiment, not only normal error sounds but also specific notification sounds, such as various security notification sounds output when the power is turned on (RAM clear notification sound, backup recovery notification sound, settings change notification sound, settings confirmation notification sound, etc.) are used. ) are also output at the volume level for error sounds. The same applies to the embodiments described below unless otherwise specified.

Further, the volume setting means 146 includes a volume adjustment notification means 146a, a reset means 146b, and the like. The volume adjustment notification means 146a is for displaying a volume adjustment notification image PV on the liquid crystal display means 106, for example. A volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed on the display means 106.

The volume adjustment notification image PV is for notifying the volume setting status by the player's operation. For example, as shown in FIG. It is provided with volume display figures 151 to 155. The volume display figures 151 to 155 are formed, for example, in the shape of a vertical strip having a length according to the player's setting value, and are arranged in the left-right direction with their lower ends aligned, for example. Each of the volume display figures 151 to 155 can be displayed in two types of display modes, for example, "white" and "solid", and depending on the player's setting value at that time, for example, a predetermined display from the volume display figure 151 side can be displayed. The player setting value regarding the volume is notified by displaying the number as "solid color" and displaying the other numbers as "white". For example, in the case of the player setting value M3, as shown in FIG. ” are displayed respectively.

In this way, the volume adjustment notification image PV indicates the range of player setting values (first information) that can be selected by operating the volume operation means 39 by the number of volume display figures displayed, and also displays the volume by "solid painting". The number of displayed figures indicates the player setting value (second information) at that time. In the following explanation, the volume adjustment notification images PV corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M5 are distinguished as PV1 to PV5, respectively.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the initial position is different for each hall setting value, so if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed, the volume The adjustment notification image PV also changes. For example, as shown in FIGS. 31(a) to (e), when the hall setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M1 (initial position), the hall setting value is set while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed. When is changed in the order of T3 → T4 → T5 → T6 → T7, the volume level changes in order from 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 according to the initial position corresponding to the hall setting value after the change, and the volume level is adjusted. The notification image PV also changes sequentially from PV1 to PV2 to PV3 to PV4 to PV5 in accordance with the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value.

The reset means (second volume level changing means) 146b is for resetting the volume level, and when a predetermined reset condition is satisfied, changes the player setting value (i.e., the volume level) to correspond to the hall setting value. It is designed to be reset to the initial position (specific volume level). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, first and second reset conditions are provided as reset conditions for resetting the volume level, and the first reset condition is "when the volume adjustment knob 140 is switched". , the second reset condition (predetermined condition) is "When the demo start condition is met during the customer waiting state (for example, 180 seconds have passed since the start of the customer waiting state), and the player setting value is smaller than the initial position." ing.

For example, (a) → (b), (b) → (c), (c) → (d), and (d) → (e) in FIG. 31 all show the situation when the first reset condition is satisfied. After switching the volume adjustment knob 140, the player setting value (ie, the volume level) is set to the initial position corresponding to the new hall setting value. For example, if the hall setting value is set to T5, 180 seconds have passed since the start of the customer waiting state, and the player setting value at that time is M1 which is smaller than the initial position M3 (specific volume level 5). (volume level 3) or M2 (volume level 4) (predetermined condition is satisfied), the player setting value is reset to M3 (specific volume level 5).

In this way, the reset means 146b adjusts the volume level so that the volume of the normal sound production and the volume of the specific sound production are in a predetermined balance, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, regardless of the player's volume adjustment operation. It constitutes a changeable second volume level changing means.

The light amount setting means 147 is used to set the light amount when the illumination means 136 etc. made of various light emitting boards on the frame side and the board side emit light, and corresponds to the player setting value obtained by the light amount operation means 40. The light intensity level is set to one of a plurality of levels (for example, three levels 1 to 3). As described above, in this embodiment, the light amount level can be adjusted only by operating the light amount operating means 40, without providing operating means for hall personnel such as the volume adjustment knob 140. Further, the light intensity level regarding the error notification light emission is always the maximum light intensity level, for example, and cannot be changed by the light intensity operation means 40. Note that the light amount adjustment by the light amount operation means 40 can be performed during a predetermined light amount adjustable period. Although the light amount adjustable period can be arbitrarily set, for example, all periods except a certain period when the power is turned on may be set as the light amount adjustable period.

Further, the light amount setting means 147 includes a light amount adjustment notification means 147a. The light amount adjustment notification means 147a is for displaying the light amount adjustment notification image PL on the liquid crystal display means 106, for example, and during the light amount adjustment notification period, including when the player operates the light amount operation means 40, the liquid crystal display means A light amount adjustment notification image PL is displayed at 106.

For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the light amount adjustment notification image PL includes a plurality of (here, three) light amount display figures 161 to 163 corresponding to the number of light amount levels. The light quantity display figures 161 to 163 are formed, for example, in the shape of a vertical strip with a length corresponding to the light quantity level, and are arranged in the left-right direction with their lower ends aligned, for example. Each of the light amount display figures 161 to 163 can be displayed in two types of display mode, for example, "white" and "solid color", and depending on the light amount level at that time, a predetermined number of light amount display figures 161 to 163 can be displayed, for example, from the light amount display figure 161 side. The light intensity level is notified by setting the display mode to "solid color" and the other display formats to "white". For example, when the light intensity level is set to 1, as shown in FIG. " is displayed.

Next, a specific example of the symbol variation performance in this pachinko machine will be explained. First, a specific example of the pending change effect will be explained with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34, but before that, the purpose of this pending change effect will be explained.

In recent years, with the spread of smartphones, the use of apps such as SNS, games, manga, and video sites has rapidly spread, and many players are seen playing with their smartphones in hand even while playing pachinko and pachislot. It's starting to look like this. Such players may be distracted by operating their smartphones while playing, watching played videos, or engaging in SNS, and their eyes may not be on the pachinko/pachislot board but on their smartphones. Often.

One of the reasons why such phenomena occur is thought to be due to the game nature of pachinko and pachislot. In other words, since pachinko and pachislot are designed to repeatedly play winning games while maintaining a predetermined probability and a predetermined winning rate (rolling rate per predetermined time), (number of losing games (time)) > (winning games) It is inevitable that the number of times (time)) will be increased, and players will inevitably end up spending a lot of time on losing games. Therefore, for the players, much of the time they spend playing games ends up being boring and unsuccessful games.

For this reason, manufacturers of pachinko and pachislot have always considered performances and announcements from various angles that will keep players from getting bored, and have created highly entertaining performances and announcements to help players endure repeated losing games. Ta. However, as mentioned above, players these days are using smartphones to beat boredom during losing games, and they are showing interest in the presentations and previews that manufacturers have put effort into thinking. A situation has arisen where there is no such thing. In this embodiment, in order to deliver more effective effects and previews to players who enjoy using smartphones during games as described above, effects and previews are constructed taking into consideration the following points, for example. I have to.

First of all, when considering a gimmick to change the situation where the player's interest is (smartphone) > (directions and previews) to (smartphone) < (directions and previews), it is important to consider spending money on losing games. This means that in all aspects of time, we do not intentionally create a relationship between (smartphone) and (direction and previews). If we try to build a relationship of (smartphone) < (production and notice) in all the time spent on losing games, the presentation and notice will become more visually flashy and complex, and on the contrary, important parts will be lost to the player. This leads to them not being able to deliver (I know it's flashy, but it doesn't convey trust or expectations well). In addition, it is simply assumed that players who enjoy using smartphones are enjoying the content that they are particularly interested in from among the many types of content, so it is possible that all the players who spend money on losing games will be able to enjoy the content that is of particular interest to them. It is almost impossible to do this in a timely manner, and to be honest, even if you try to compete head-on with smartphones in this respect, you have no chance of winning.

Taking these into consideration, in this embodiment, we have chosen not to intentionally create a relationship of (smartphone) < (performance or notice) in all the time spent on losing games.

In this case, the next important thing is how to create a gimmick that changes the player's interest from (smartphone) > (directions and previews) to (smartphone) < (directions and previews). It depends on whether you set it to . For example, if the frequency of appearance in one losing game is set to be high for a performance or notice that aims to change (smartphone) < (performance or notice), even if such a production or notice appears, As a result, the frequency of deriving a losing result increases. This is effective for players who are new to the game, but the effect gradually fades for players who are already familiar with the game, and in the end, it is possible that (smartphones) > (directions and previews) will become less effective. becomes more sexual. Of course, this is not to say that this is not good as a presentation or a preview of a gaming machine, but it is possible to intentionally set the frequency of appearance in a single losing game to be high, or to create a structure in which it appears multiple times during a single losing game. Accordingly, as described above, a configuration may be adopted that provides effects and previews that are more effective only for players who are seeing the game for the first time.

However, in order to be more effective not only for first-time players but also for known players, it is necessary to create a production that aims to change interest from (smartphone) to (production and preview). It is desirable to set the appearance frequency in one losing game of a game or a preview to be low. In other words, by setting the appearance frequency of such effects and previews to be low, the aim is to change the player's interest from (smartphone) > (effects and previews) to (smartphone) < (effects and previews). It is possible to set the reliability of the performance and preview to be high (as the appearance rate in losing games decreases, the reliability at the time of appearance becomes relatively high), so the frequency at which a winning result is derived when it appears can be set to be high. Can be set high. This makes it possible to change the player's interest from (smartphone)>(performances and previews) to (smartphone)<(performances and previews), regardless of whether they are seeing it for the first time or are already familiar with it.

The most important point is that the effects and announcements to change the player's interest from (smartphone) to (effects and announcements) are as shown in Figure 33 below. This allows for more effective presentations and notices.

The hold change effect shown in FIG. 33 is executed during or before the reach change in the normal gaming state, and is held during the change to indicate the possibility that the effect symbol 120 will become a jackpot due to the change. Change the display color of image Z from the default white (usually reserved) to red (red reserved) (The order of colors that indicate the degree of expectation is blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc. The color changes more easily to a color indicating a relatively high reliability level (here, red or higher) than a low reliability level (here, blue or green). Regarding this hold change effect, first, the image effect will be explained. At the start of this hold change effect, the screen of the liquid crystal display means 106 is toned down (visibility suppressed), and an image showing an "arrow" appears ( In FIG. 33(a), a pre-retention change effect that creates a reservation change is started. At this time, on the screen of the liquid crystal display means 106, in addition to the "arrow" image related to the pending change effect, held images including the changing pending image Z, and the effect pattern 120 reduced and retreated to the corner of the screen are displayed. However, for example, by excluding the "arrow" image and the reserved image from being toned down, and making the other parts including the production pattern 120 the target of tonedown, the "arrow" image and the reserved image can be reduced. It is designed to visually make it stand out. At this time, the pending images including the pending image Z during fluctuation are displayed in white (normal pending), which is the default color.

Here, toning down the image, the priority of each layer (non-target layer) displaying the "arrow" image and the reserved image that are not subject to tonedown is changed to the image such as the production pattern 120 that is subject to tonedown. This is done by setting the priority level higher than that of each layer (target layer) to be displayed, and by arranging a specific layer displaying tone-down data such as black semi-transparent data between the non-target layer and the target layer. Note that, for example, when an "arrow" appears, in addition to toning it down, it is also possible to perform effect processing or other emphasizing display. After the "arrow" appears, the "arrow" flies, approaches and collides with (hits) the fluctuating pending image Z (Fig. 33(b) → (c)), and the collided fluctuating pending image Z. The display color of Z changes from white to red (FIG. 33(d)). Note that the performance before pending change in FIG. 33 is a success pattern when a pending change is performed, but a failure pattern when a pending change is not performed may be provided. This failure pattern may be configured such that, for example, an "arrow" does not hit the pending image Z during fluctuation.

Next, the sound production of the hold change production shown in FIG. 33 will be explained. First, regarding the normal sound production consisting of audio output from the speakers 18 and 25, one type of BGM1 is continuously output throughout the entire hold change production, and as a volume increase production that temporarily increases the volume, '' appears, the ``appearance sound'' (first voice) is heard, when the ``arrow'' approaches, the ``fanning sound (third voice)'' is heard, and when the ``arrow'' collides and changes color, the ``collision change sound'' (second voice) is heard. ) are output respectively. Furthermore, regarding the specific sound production in which an operation sound is generated by driving a predetermined part by the driving means, the vibration sound caused by the vibration device 72 vibrating the production button 41 is generated in parallel with the "collision change sound" in the normal sound production, for example. occurs.

In addition, FIG. 33 shows the change history of the volume (dB) of the executed sound due to the sound production (normal sound production and specific sound production), which shows the change history of the volume (dB) of the executed sound due to the sound production (normal sound production and specific sound production). (see FIG. 28) are displayed numerically and graphically. As is clear from the figure, in this hold change performance, regardless of the volume level, there is a jackpot mode (specific mode) in the final section (2s to 3s) included in the latter half section of the hold change effect (0 to 3s). The volume (second volume) of the "collision change sound" etc. that occurs when suggesting the possibility that the change will occur is the "appearance sound" that occurs at the start (0s) included in the first half of the pending change production (specific notice). etc. (first volume). In addition, the volume (third volume) of the "inciting sound" etc. that occurs in the middle section (1 s) before the final section after the start of the hold change performance is the same as the "appearance sound" etc. that occurs at the start of the hold change performance. It is lower than the volume (first volume).

In this way, in the pending change performance (specific performance) shown in FIG. 33, the first half section does not yet suggest the possibility of becoming a jackpot mode (specific mode), and the second half section suggests the possibility of becoming a jackpot mode (specific mode). In the first half, the audio (first audio) related to the pending change performance (specific performance) is output at the first volume, and in the second half, the audio (second audio) regarding the pending change performance (specific performance) is output at the first volume. The output is performed at a second volume that is higher than the first volume, and furthermore, after the first half of the section in which audio is output at the first volume, and before the second half of the section in which audio is output at the second volume, the corresponding The sound (third sound) related to the pending change performance (specific performance) is output at a third volume lower than the first volume.

As described above, by generating the "appearance sound" or the like that is executed when a preview appears at the first volume, it is possible to first make the player aware that a preview has appeared. In other words, it is possible to draw the player's line of sight from the smartphone to the liquid crystal screen on the gaming machine board. Additionally, in the example shown in Figure 33, in addition to this, the tone of the LCD screen has been toned down, so it is possible to give a different impression to the player who has turned his attention to the LCD screen. , it is possible to keep the player's eyes glued to the LCD screen. Of course, the screen is not limited to a toned-down screen, but may also be a white-out screen, and at that time, by already displaying an image of an "arrow", it is possible to create a mechanism to keep the player's attention fixed. You may also do so.

Next, it is desirable that the volume (third volume) of the "inciting sound" etc. generated following the "appearance sound" is lower than the volume (first volume) of the "appearance sound" etc. The key point here is that the role of the audio output here is only as an "inciting sound." In other words, players who shift their gaze from their smartphones to the LCD screen may stop operating their smartphones and look at the LCD screen, with a sense of expectation that a relatively highly anticipated performance will be executed. Although it is conceivable, the "inciting sound" executed at this timing is just a sound effect to incite whether or not the subsequent change in the pending image (effect indicating the degree of expectation) will be executed or not. By performing the performance at a volume higher than the first volume or the second volume, it gives the player an excessive sense of expectation, and if the highly anticipated performance is not performed afterwards, it gives the player a great sense of regret. We take into account the risk of In particular, this is the moment when the player's interest was stolen from the smartphone to the LCD screen, so if the effects and previews are constructed without taking such risks into account, the result will be changes in the pending image (expected If a similar effect or notice is not carried out, known players will feel a strong sense of disgust if a similar effect or notice is not carried out. There is a high possibility that they will no longer shift their gaze from the smartphone to the LCD screen. Taking these into consideration, the volume of the "agitation sound" (third volume) is determined by the volume of the "appearance sound" (first volume), and the volume of the subsequent "collision change sound" (second volume). ) is desirable.

Next, when a "collision change sound" or the like is generated following the "inciting sound" or the like, that is, when a change in the pending image (a production that suggests the degree of expectation) is performed, a "collision change sound" or the like is generated. The volume (second volume) is desirably set higher than the volume of the "appearance sound" (first volume) and the volume of the "agitation sound" (third volume). One of the purposes of such a setting is to increase interest in the change in pending images (a performance that suggests expectations) for players who have already shifted their gaze from their smartphones to the LCD screen. The goal is to liven up the atmosphere as much as possible. The second purpose is to once again appeal to players who unfortunately were unable to attract attention at the time the notice was issued. Some players are not interested in the appearance of a preview, but are only interested in the result of the preview, so for such players, it is recommended to play at a volume louder than the "appearance sound" or "inciting sound". By generating a "collision change sound" or the like, it is possible to effectively direct the eye toward the LCD screen.

In this way, the reservation change notice shown in FIG. 33 attracts more player attention than when simply executing a reservation change effect (a performance that only changes the color of the reservation using a performance image). This makes it possible to draw attention to the LCD display, even for players who may be concentrating on operating their smartphones and not paying attention to the LCD display. By combining this type of performance that steals attention away from the smartphone with a normal performance that does not, it is possible to execute a performance that more effectively steals attention away from the smartphone. Become. In other words, by coexisting with each other, rather than just performing one or the other, and inventing ways to execute them with more optimal timing and expressions, we can achieve unprecedented performance expressions and solve the problems of recent times. It becomes possible to steal the player's gaze and attention from a certain smartphone.

Further, in the example of FIG. 33, since the production button 41 is vibrated to generate a vibration sound at the timing of outputting the "collision change sound" etc., for example, the volume control means 39 is operated to set the volume level low. Even players who are concentrating on their smartphones can be appealed to by the vibrating sound that is generated at a substantially constant volume, regardless of the volume level, and can effectively catch their attention.

The numerical values and graphs of the volume change history shown in FIG. 33 described above display the volume of the execution sound that combines the normal sound production and the specific sound production, but in FIG. 34, the volume of the execution sound of the normal sound production. and the volume of the sound executed by the specific sound production are displayed separately. Of the normal sound production and specific sound production, only the normal sound production changes the volume of the executed sound depending on the change in the volume level (set volume), and the specific sound production does not change the volume level (set volume). However, this does not change the volume of the execution sound. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, the volume change history due to normal sound production has approximately the same shape at each volume level, and when the volume level is changed from 3 (first set volume) to 7 (second set volume), The rate of increase (volume ratio), which is the rate of change in volume, is always approximately 1.2. On the other hand, the volume of the vibration sound in the specific sound production is 80 dB regardless of the volume level. Note that the volume of this specific sound production, 80 dB, is larger than the volume of the normal sound production at the minimum volume level 3 during the same period, and is also higher than the volume of the normal sound production at the maximum volume level 7. It is smaller than.

On the other hand, looking at the volume change history (Figure 33) that combines the normal sound production and specific sound production, it is found that during the period when the normal sound production occurs and the specific sound production does not occur (non-specific period), the volume level The rate of increase in volume when changing from 3 to 7 is approximately 1.2 (first volume ratio), but the period during which both the normal sound production and the specific sound production occur (specific period) The increase rate in the middle is smaller than 1.2 (second volume ratio). Note that the combined sound volume LP (dB) obtained by combining the first sound volume LP1 (dB) and the second sound volume LP2 (dB) is determined by the formula shown in FIG. 35.

In this way, in the hold change effects shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the minimum volume level (first setting volume) that can be changed by player operation is set to 3, and the maximum volume level (second setting volume) is set to 3. 7, a non-specific period in which the volume ratio of the executed sound when the sound production is executed is the first volume ratio, and a specific period in which the volume ratio is the second volume ratio smaller than the first volume ratio. has been established. Further, during the non-specific period, the normal sound effect is executed, but the specific sound effect is not executed, and during the specific period, the normal sound effect and the specific sound effect are executed. Further, the volume of the specific sound production is set lower than the volume of the normal sound production during the specific period when the maximum volume level (second set volume) is set to 7.

Further, when the hall setting value by the volume adjustment knob 140 is set to T4, as shown in FIG. 28, the initial position of the volume level is set to volume level 4 corresponding to the player setting value M2. In this case, in the example from 2s to 3s in FIG. 34, when the volume level is set to 3 (first level), the volume of the normal sound production is higher than the volume of the specific sound production, so the specific sound production The volume of the normal sound production is more difficult to hear (hearing) than the normal sound production, but when the volume level is set to 7 (third level), the volume of the normal sound production is higher than the volume of the specific sound production. Since the volume is small, the volume of the normal sound production is easier to hear (hear) than the specific sound production. Furthermore, when the volume level is set to 4 (second level), the volume level is higher than when it is set to volume level 3 (first level) and when it is set to volume level 7 (third level). , the difference between the volume due to the specific sound production and the volume due to the normal sound production is small. In this case, the reset means (second volume level changing means) 146b changes (resets) the volume level to volume level 4 (second level) when a predetermined reset condition is satisfied (FIG. 32). It has become. The same thing can be said about the cases where the hall setting value is set to T4, T5, and T6, but in these cases, the initial position of the second level (in the case of T5, the volume level 5. In the case of T6, when the volume level is set to 6), the difference between the volume due to the specific sound production and the volume due to the normal sound production is smaller than when the volume level is set to 7 (third level). However, it is louder than when the volume level is set to 3 (first level).

In addition, by providing the first hold change performance shown in FIG. 33 and a second hold change performance that excludes the specific sound performance from the first hold change performance, the first hold change performance is more effective than when the second hold change performance appears. Control may be performed so that the possibility of a jackpot mode is higher when a performance appears. In addition, in the hold change effect shown in FIG. 33, the display mode of the changing pending image Z corresponding to the change is changed, but the display mode of the first hold images X1 to X4, second hold images Y1 to Y4, etc. It may be changed at any timing. Furthermore, display aspects other than the display color, such as shape, size, etc., may be changed for the held image.

Next, regarding the performance during normal fluctuation (symbol fluctuation according to the normal fluctuation pattern), specific examples will be given separately for the probability change state (special game state) shown in FIG. 36 and the normal game state shown in FIGS. 37 and 38. explain.

The normal variation during the probability change state (high probability medium) has a short variation time of about several seconds, and in the example of FIG. Start → high-speed fluctuation → stop) is repeated. In addition, in the example shown in Fig. 36, high-precision BGM is continuously output as a normal sound production, and as a symbol variation sound, a "start sound" is output in time with the start of symbol variation and high-speed variation. A "stop sound" is output when the vehicle stops.

Moreover, in the example of FIG. 36, various notices are executed at specific symbol variations. That is, the vibration device 72 vibrates the production button 41 in accordance with the pattern stop and the output of the "stop sound" at each timing of elapsed time 8s, 10s, and 12s corresponding to three consecutive symbol changes. A sound is generated (specific sound production). In addition, at the timing of the elapsed time of 14 seconds corresponding to the next symbol change, for example, the entire screen is toned down as shown in FIG. "sound" is output. Furthermore, at the timing of the elapsed time of 16 seconds corresponding to the next symbol change, as shown in FIG. The movable body 109 moves upward (specific sound production). Furthermore, at the timing of the elapsed time of 18 to 19 seconds corresponding to the next symbol change, as shown in FIG. be exposed.

Further, FIG. 36-1 shows the volume of the execution sound of the normal sound production and the volume of the execution sound of the specific sound production separately for the range from 6s to 14s in FIG. 36. As shown in Figure 36-1, the volume change history due to normal sound production has approximately the same shape at each volume level, and the volume level was changed from 3 (first set volume) to 7 (second set volume). The rate of increase (volume ratio), which is the rate of change in volume, is always about 1.2. On the other hand, the volume of the vibration sound in the specific sound production is 80 dB regardless of the volume level, which is higher than the volume of the normal sound production at volume level 5 at any of 8s, 10s, and 12s. The volume is approximately the same as or lower than the volume of the normal sound production at 6.

On the other hand, looking at the volume change history (Figure 36) that combines the normal sound production and the specific sound production, it is found that during the period when the specific sound production does not occur (non-specific period), the volume level is changed from 3 to 7. The rate of increase, which is the rate of change in volume when (Specified period), the rate of increase is smaller than 1.2. In addition, both normal sound production and specific sound production occur at the timing of elapsed time of 16s, 18s, and 19s, but among them, the increase rate at the time of elapsed time of 16s is 1.2, which is the same as the non-specific period. There is. This is because the movement sound of the third movable body 109 of the panel is about 50 dB, which is very small compared to the sound from the speaker, and has almost no effect on the overall volume change.

In the normal fluctuation during the normal gaming state (medium low probability) shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, one symbol fluctuation is performed during the elapsed time period of 1 s to 9 s, and the fluctuation starts at the elapsed time of 1 s, After performing high-speed fluctuations in 2s to 5s, the symbols stop in the order of left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol in 6s to 9s, and finally come to a final stop. In addition, as a normal sound production, normal BGM is continuously output, and as a symbol variation sound, a "starting sound" is made at each stop of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol in accordance with the start of symbol variation. At the same time, a "stop sound" is output. Further, at 3 seconds during the high-speed fluctuation, an SU1 fake effect of the SU effect appears, and for example, a predetermined line is displayed as a telop on the screen, and a predetermined "SU sound" is output from the speakers 18 and 25.

In addition, in the next symbol variation that takes place during the elapsed time period of 10s to 23s, SU1, SU2, and SU3 effects of the SU effect are executed sequentially at 11s, 12s, and 13s during the high-speed variation, and predetermined lines are displayed on the screen. At the same time as the telop is displayed, the "SU sound" is output from the speakers 18 and 25, and in the subsequent 14s to 16s, an SU3 confirmation effect, that is, an image indicating SU3 confirmation is displayed on the screen. Further, at the time of the SU3 confirmation effect, a "confirmation sound" is outputted as a volume increase effect, and then the character's lines (character voice) are outputted as audio.

In addition, in the next symbol variation performed from the elapsed time of 24 seconds, at the start of the variation, a vibration sound (specific sound production) of the production button 41 is generated in accordance with the output of the "start sound" (normal sound production) (normal sound production) and a special sound performance). This is an example of a jackpot suggestion effect (first special effect) that can suggest the possibility of a jackpot due to the symbol change, and indicates that the possibility of a jackpot is higher than when no vibration sound is generated. It shows.

Further, FIG. 38-1 shows the volume of the execution sound of the normal sound production and the volume of the execution sound of the specific sound production separately for the range 22s to 26s in FIG. 38. As shown in Figure 38-1, the volume change history due to normal sound production has approximately the same shape at each volume level, and the volume level was changed from 3 (first set volume) to 7 (second set volume). The rate of increase (volume ratio), which is the rate of change in volume, is always approximately 1.2. On the other hand, the volume of the vibration sound in the specific sound production is 80 dB regardless of the volume level, which is higher than the volume of the normal sound production when the volume level is 6, and the volume of the normal sound production when the volume level is 7. It is also small.

On the other hand, looking at the volume change history (Figures 37 and 38) for the combination of the normal sound production and the specific sound production, it is found that during the period when the specific sound production does not occur (non-specific period), the volume level is changed from 3 to 7. The rate of increase, which is the rate of change in volume when changing to period), the rate of increase is smaller than 1.2.

In addition, when comparing the volume due to the normal sound production between the normal fluctuation during the probability change state (special gaming state) shown in FIG. 36 and the normal fluctuation during the normal game state (low probability medium) shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the probability change During the state (special game state), the average volume of the sound executed by the normal sound production is higher than during the normal game state (an example of a case where they are different). On the other hand, regarding the volume of the specific sound performance, there is no difference between the variable probability state (special game state) and the normal game state. That is, in this embodiment, the volume of the normal sound production is higher than the volume of the specific sound production during the variable probability state (special gaming state) than during the normal gaming state, and this causes ) It is easier to hear (easier to hear) operation sounds such as vibration sounds caused by specific sound effects in the normal game state than during the normal game state compared to the sounds from the speakers 18 and 25 caused by the normal sound effects.

In addition, when the normal sound production and specific sound production are executed at the same time, the increase rate which is the rate of change in volume when changing the volume level from 3 to 7 (sound production when set to the minimum volume level) The volume ratio of the sound effect when the maximum volume level is set to the maximum volume level) is determined by the normal fluctuation during the probability change state (special gaming state) shown in FIG. 36, and the normal fluctuation during the normal gaming state (low probability When compared with the normal fluctuation (medium), it is larger during the variable probability state (special gaming state) than during the normal gaming state.

In addition, both during the normal gaming state and during the variable probability state (special gaming state), when both the normal sound production and the specific sound production are executed, the volume of each execution sound is set to the minimum volume level (here When the volume level is set to 3), the volume of the normal sound production is lower than the volume of the specific sound production, and the volume of the normal sound production is more difficult to hear than the specific sound production. When the volume level is set to the maximum volume level (volume level 7 in this case), the volume of the normal sound production is louder than the volume of the specific sound production, and the volume of the normal sound production is louder than the volume of the specific sound production. It's easy to do.

Next, two specific examples will be described in FIGS. 39 to 43 and FIGS. 44 to 48, which have different jackpot reliability with respect to performances during reach fluctuations (symbol fluctuations after reach due to reach fluctuation patterns). In reach performance A (low jackpot reliability) shown in FIGS. 39 to 43, a performance themed around a battle between a monster and the main character, a kappa, is performed. In the early period of the reach variation (elapsed time 0s to 41s), the image performance and the corresponding normal sound performance are performed, and the specific sound performance (operation sound) is not performed.

In this early period, the image production scene is "Reach title display" → "Monster appears" → "Mini monster appears" → "Protagonist (Kappa) appears" → "Mini monster attack" → "Protagonist avoids & prepares" → " The scene progresses in the order of "The main character attacks and repulses the mini monster" → "Monster reappears" → "Monster attacks the main character", and each scene is composed of one or more cuts (cut division).

Here, a cut is the timing at which, for example, the continuity of images is broken and scene images (including not only still images but also videos) are switched in a series of moving images composed of multiple scene images. , for example, when switching from a first scene to a second scene. By switching the scene, the content displayed on the LCD changes, for example, from an image of an ally character depicted in the first scene to an image of a monster depicted in the second scene. In this way, by switching the scene of the image of the character desired to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen, an expression that appears on the screen can be executed in the reach effect.

This allows you to instantly switch the content drawn in the first scene to the second scene, so when you want to display a different character or switch to a different scene as described above, you can change the displayed content. This is an effective technique when making sweeping changes. Of course, cuts may change in the middle of a scene.

On the other hand, by expressing the image on the LCD so that it transitions up, down, left, or right (like when you shake a video camera left, right, up, or down) without using cuts, you can, for example, move from an ally character to the opposite side. There is also a technique to change the display target of the LCD display to the monster located at . In this way, by creating an expression that transitions the images on the LCD screen while maintaining continuity, it is possible to give the player a sense of the positional relationships between characters and the surrounding environment, as described above. can. When creating videos for reach performances, etc., techniques such as the above-mentioned cuts and video transitions are combined to create a single video in the most optimal form.

In each scene, text captions are displayed as necessary. For example, in the "Reach Title Display" scene (0s to 3s), a title caption such as "Monster VS Kappa" is displayed (Figure 39(a)), and in some scenes from "Monster Appearance" to "Mini Monster Appearance" (5s - 9s), there are monster dialogue captions such as "Gaoh" (Figure 39(b), (c)), and in the second half of the scene (17s to 18s) of "Protagonist avoids & prepares", hero dialogue captions such as "Exterminate!" (Figure 39(d)), in the scenes from ``the monster reappears'' to ``the monster attacks the protagonist'' (32s to 41s), monster lines such as ``Gaoh'' are displayed on the screen (Figure 39(e)). be done. It should be noted that the effect pattern 120 is displayed in a retracted position at the corner of the screen.

Here, regarding the "reach title display" scene, the display mode of the title subtitle, for example, the display color, may be changed to indicate the reliability of the reach effect. In addition, before displaying the telop of the reach title and/or reading out the reach title (this will be explained later), the first and second characters (monster and kappa in this case) will be displayed on the screen as the characters used in the reach effect. It may also be displayed. This makes it possible to display and output audio regarding the reach title after making the player aware of the content of the reach effect, so compared to the case where everything is displayed at once, the player can easily understand the reach effect. The content can be easily understood. In addition, if the level of reliability varies depending on the type of character that appears in the reach effect (in cases where the reach effect branches to a reach effect depending on the character that appears), indicate the characters scheduled to appear in advance. By doing so, it is possible to notify the content of the reach effect at the branch destination and then display the reach title. In addition, in this case, if the character caption is used to suggest the reliability level when displaying the reach title as described above, the player will be able to Since the information can be conveyed to multiple players, it is easier for the player to understand the information than when the information is conveyed all at once. In addition, it is desirable to read out the reach title by voice, which will be described later, when all of the contents are in place. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a subtitle of the reach title, suggest reliability, display the first and second characters that appear, etc. during or after the reach title is read out. . This makes it possible for the player to feel the sense of surprise, so it is possible to increase the interest in the performance at the timing of starting the ready-to-win performance.

In addition, in the normal sound production during the early period, a plurality of types of BGM are sequentially played according to the scene, and a sound (telop voice) corresponding to the telop displayed on the screen is also played. That is, while the telop related to the reach title of "Monster VS Kappa" is displayed (0s to 3s), the telop voice reading out the reach title is displayed, and while the telop related to the monster's lines is displayed (5s to 9s, 32s to 41s), the monster voice is, While the telop regarding the main character's lines is displayed (17s to 18s), the main character's voice is output from the respective speakers.

At this time, when a specific voice (here, the main character's voice corresponding to the main character's dialogue telop) is output (elapsed time 17s, 18s), the playback of the BGM up to that point is paused, and when the specific sound ends, BGM playback will now resume. Also, at this time, the BGM that is restarted is different from the previous BGM. In this way, when a specific voice (main character voice) is output at the timing of switching from the first BGM to the second BGM, a BGM stop period (output stop period) is provided from the stop of the first BGM to the start of the second BGM. , a specific sound (predetermined sound different from the first and second BGM) may be output during this BGM stop period. In this case, at the timing when the BGM stop period ends, that is, at the timing when the second BGM is output, the "main character evades and takes stance" scene (first scene) changes to the "main character attacks and repulses mini monster" scene (second scene). scene). Note that the BGM stop period may be a mute period in which no sound is output from the speaker.

In addition, in the normal sound performance during this early period, in addition to the telop voice corresponding to the telop, a reach performance voice corresponding to each scene of the reach performance is output, and a volume increase performance is executed at an arbitrary timing. For example, in a part of the scene (19s to 29s) in which the main character attacks and repulses a mini-monster, the mini-monster's dialogue voice (mini-voice) is output without the caption being displayed. In addition, in the "Protagonist Evasion & Stance" scene (15s to 18s), an "evasion sound" is output when the main character evades a mini-monster's attack, a "stance sound" is output when the main character takes a stance, and a "main character In some of the scenes (21s, 31s) where the main character attacks and repulses mini-monsters, an ``attack sound'' is output when the main character attacks, and a ``repulsion sound'' is output when the mini-monster is repelled.

In the middle period of the reach variation (elapsed time 42s to 63s), a specific sound performance (operation sound) is performed in addition to the image performance and the corresponding normal sound performance. In this middle period, the image production scenes progress in the following order: ``The hero stands up'' → ``The monster and the hero are about to collide'' → ``Accessory effect'' → ``Rainbow effect'' → ``Defeating'' → ``The monster falls down.''

During this mid-stage period, button effects and corresponding movable object effects are the main focus, and no subtitles are displayed on the screen except for a few. First, in the scene (42s to 48s) where "the main character stands ready" → "the monster and the main character are about to collide", the screen is toned down (visibility suppressed) and the fade-in image of the production button 41 is displayed on the screen. (FIG. 41(f)), a button press guidance image and a gauge image for causing the player to press the performance button 41 are displayed, and the operation valid period begins (FIG. 41(g)). The button press guidance image is composed of, for example, a moving image showing how the production button 41 is pressed and a character image such as "Press!". Moreover, the gauge image shows the remaining time of the valid operation period, etc. in real time. At this time, images related to button effects, such as button fade-in images, button press guidance images, gauge images, etc., should be excluded from the tone-down target, and other parts including the effect pattern 120 should be toned-down targets. Therefore, it is desirable to make the button effect related images visually noticeable.

In addition, during the display period (42s to 45s) of the fade-in image of the production button 41, a "fade-in sound" is output from the speaker as a volume increase production, and the rotating body 44 of the movable production means 42 swings, the board An operation sound is emitted due to the upward movement of the third movable body 109 (FIG. 41(f)→(g)). At this time, since the operating sound such as "rattling" caused by the shaking motion of the rotating body 44 is relatively loud, at the time of 42s when the rotating body 44 shakes, the sound volume level is changed from 3 to 7. The increase rate, which is the rate of change in volume, is smaller than 1.2. On the other hand, since the movement sound of the third movable body 109 of the board is about 50 dB, which is very small compared to the sound from the speaker, the increase rate from 42s to 45s is 1.2, which is the same as the non-specific period.

Here, a pattern may be provided in which the rotating body 44 is not shaken during the pre-fade notification, that is, a pattern in which no operational sound such as "rattling" is generated. Alternatively, the operation sound may be generated by vertically swinging the first plate movable body 107, the third plate movable body 109, etc., instead of the rotating body.

In addition, during the display period (46s to 48s) of the button press guidance image, a press guidance voice such as "Press the button" and a "press guidance sound" as a volume increase effect are output from the speaker, and the The third movable body 109 temporarily stops at a predetermined position, and the second movable body 108 swings and the rotating body 44 rotates. Note that at the time when the button press guidance image is displayed, the reproduction of the BGM is paused, and the press guidance voice etc. are output while the BGM is stopped.

Here, regarding the press guidance sound, for example, the player presses the production button 41 and it is continuously output until the operation validity period ends, whereas the press guidance voice such as "Press the button" , the output is stopped when it is output a predetermined number of times (for example, once) (at 47s in the example of FIG. 41), and is not continued until the end of the valid operation period. Of course, the push-down guidance voice may be output continuously until the end of the valid operation period, but in that case, there is a high possibility that the output of the push-down guidance voice will be cut off midway. In that case, if the push guidance voice is in the middle of being output at the end of the valid operation period, the output may be continued until the end.

If the production button 41 is pressed during the valid operation period, the valid operation period ends and the button press guidance image etc. is faded out from the screen (49s). In the subsequent "Rainbow Effect" scene (51a to 60s), for example, a rainbow effect (rainbow effect) in which the entire screen becomes a rainbow-colored gradation is executed.

Further, when the effect button 41 is pressed, the effect button 41 is vibrated by the drive of the vibration device 72, and a "vibration sound" is output from the speaker (from 49s). In this way, by causing the effect button 41 to vibrate when the player presses the effect button 41, the player can reliably recognize the vibration. Note that a vibration sound is generated by vibrating the production button 41 with the vibration device 72, but as mentioned above, the volume of the specific sound production changes when the player does not touch the production button 41 (the specific volume change operation is performed). When the player is touching or pressing the performance button 41 (when a specific volume change operation is being performed), the vibration device (driving means) 72 The driving of the effect button (predetermined part) 41 by the user is restricted, and the volume of the vibration sound is suppressed compared to a state where the effect button 41 is not touched. Therefore, by outputting a "vibration sound" from the speaker when the production button 41 is vibrated, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the volume of the actual vibration sound.

In this way, the volume of the normal sound production can be changed by the player operating the volume control means 39 even when the normal sound production is not in progress. Changing the volume by touching or pressing 41 to produce a specific sound effect can only be performed while the specific sound effect is being executed. Note that the "vibration sound" from this speaker may be output only during the vibration period (49s to 53s) of the production button 41, but in the example of FIG. 41, even if the vibration period of the production button 41 ends, After that, for a certain period of time (~56 seconds), "vibration sound" is continuously output from the speaker.

Here, the vibration sound output from the speaker (normal sound performance) may be output in a shorter period than the actual vibration performance and the vibration sound generated along with it (specific sound performance). Furthermore, a plurality of types of vibration sounds may be provided to be output from the speaker. Further, a plurality of vibration sounds may be outputted from the speakers, depending on the actual vibration performance and the length and vibration pattern of the vibration sounds generated accordingly. Further, even if the actual vibration effects and the lengths and vibration patterns of the vibration sounds generated therewith are different, it may be configured such that one type of vibration sound is output from the speaker. It is preferable that the vibration sound output from the speaker be similar to the vibration sound generated with the actual vibration performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the vibration sound may be different from the vibration sound output from the speaker. Even in this case, by outputting the sound in parallel with the actual vibration sound, the two can synchronize and cooperate to generate a unique vibration sound, which can increase interest.

Furthermore, during the actual vibration performance, there may be a case where the vibration sound is output from the speaker and a case where the vibration sound is not output, and the reliability may be indicated depending on which of the two cases. In addition, if a vibration effect is performed at the end of the reach to announce a win or loss, a vibration sound will be output from the speaker, and if a vibration effect is performed as a suggestion of reliability during fluctuations, a vibration sound will be output from the speaker. It may be configured so that no sound is output. Thereby, it is possible to configure different presentation modes depending on the role of the vibration presentation. Of course, the system is configured to output a vibration sound from the speaker in both cases, when the vibration effect is executed to announce the win or loss at the end of the reach, and when the vibration effect is executed as a suggestion of reliability during fluctuation. Good too.

Further, when the performance button 41 is pressed, the following post-operation performance is executed by the movable bodies 107 to 109 (49s to 54s). That is, the board third movable body 109 resumes its upward movement (from 49s), and when it reaches the maximum operating position, it waits at that position (from 51s). Subsequently, the first movable body 107 of the panel starts to move downward (from 51s), and when it reaches the maximum operating position and is vertically integrated with the third movable body 109 of the panel (53s), the movable bodies 107 to 109 are integrated. The performance is performed, and the second movable body 108 of the board performs a rotating operation, for example, as shown in FIG. 41(h) (53s to 54s). Note that during this post-operation performance, a "movable sound" corresponding to the movement of the movable bodies 107 to 109 is output from the speaker as a volume increase performance. Further, at a predetermined timing after the production button 41 is pressed, the reproduction of the BGM after the button is pressed is started (from 52s).

When the post-operation effect (49s to 54s) is completed, the first board movable body 107 and the third board movable body 109 each start moving to the origin position (FIG. 41(h)→(i)). At a predetermined timing during movement, the main character's voice corresponding to a successful button press is output from the speaker, and at the timing when each movable body 107, 109 reaches its respective origin position, the speaker outputs a "return to origin sound" as a volume increase effect. " is output.

In the "defeat" and "monster collapse" scenes after the end of "Rainbow Effect" (61s to 63s), the main character's dialogue is displayed as a caption on the screen, and the main character's voice corresponding to the dialogue is output from the speaker. At the end, the fallen monster's lines (monster voice) are output. Note that during the "defeat" scene, the playback of BGM is stopped, and at the start of the "monster falls" scene (62s), playback of a new BGM is started while the main character's voice is being output.

FIG. 43-1 shows the volume of the normal sound performance and the volume of the specific sound performance separately displayed for the period from 42s to 61s in FIG. 41. As shown in FIG. 43-1, from 42s in which the swinging motion of the rotating body 44 and the raising of the third movable body 109 of the board are performed as the specific sound production, to 43s in which only the raising of the third movable body 109 of the board is performed. ~45s, and then from 46s to 47s, during which the rotating operation of the rotating body 44 and the shaking operation of the second movable panel 108 are performed, the volume of the specific sound production is set at all settable volume levels. The volume is lower than the normal sound production volume.

After that, at the time of 48s, the shaking motion of the second movable board 108 ends and only the rotating motion of the rotating body 44 becomes the specific sound production, so the volume due to the specific sound production becomes slightly smaller, but the normal sound production Also, since the BGM has stopped, the push-down guidance voice ends, and the volume suddenly decreases, the volume of the specific sound production is higher than the volume of the normal sound production at the minimum volume level 3. The volume is lower than the volume of the normal sound production at volume level 4 above.

Subsequently, during the period from 49s to 53s when the vibration sound of the production button 41 is generated, the volume of the specific sound production is maintained larger than the volume of the normal sound production at the minimum volume level 3. Specifically, the volume of the specific sound production during the period from 49s to 52s is higher than the volume of the normal sound production at the minimum volume level 3 and smaller than the volume of the normal sound production at the volume level 4, and the volume is lower than the volume of the normal sound production at the minimum volume level 4, The volume of the specific sound production at the time point is larger than the volume of the normal sound production at volume level 4 and smaller than the volume of the normal sound production at volume level 5. After 54 seconds after the vibrating sound of the production button 41 ends, the volume of the specific sound production is the normal sound production at all settable volume levels, except for 55 seconds when the volume of the normal sound production suddenly decreases. The volume is lower than the volume of

In the final period of the reach variation (elapsed time 64s to 98s), the image production and the corresponding normal sound production are executed, and the specific sound production (operation sound) is not executed except for the vibration sound from 93s to 95s.

In this final period, the image production scene is ``The main character chases and defeats the monster as it tries to attack again'' → ``Golden effect'' → ``Black background'' → ``Golden effect'' → ``The main character waves the flag.'' ” → “Golden Effect”.

In the scene where the main character pursues and defeats the monster as it tries to attack again, the effect pattern 120 that is being displayed in retreat is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 42(j) (64s to 69s), and then As shown in 42(k), the game is temporarily stopped in a normal jackpot mode such as "4.4.4" (70s to 77s). During this scene, for example, before the performance pattern 120 is enlarged (64s to 67s), the main character's dialogue is displayed as a telop, and the main character's voice corresponding to the dialogue is output. Also, as a volume increase effect. When defeating a monster, the "defeat sound" etc. is output from the speaker.

In the subsequent "gold effect" scene (78s to 80s), as shown in FIG. 42(l), a golden effect is executed in which the entire screen becomes golden, and the temporarily stopped production pattern 120 is reduced, for example. The re-variation (full rotation) is started, the BGM is switched again, and the "re-variation sound" is output from the speaker as a volume increase effect.

Then, after the "black background" where the entire screen is blacked out, the button effect is performed again in the next "gold effect" scene. That is, after the pre-fade notification is performed on the screen from the end of "black background" to the beginning of "golden effect" (FIG. 43(m)), the fade-in image of the production button 41 is displayed (FIG. 43(n)). )) Then, a button press guidance image and a gauge image are displayed, and the valid operation period starts (FIG. 43(o)). In addition, in the pre-fade notification, for example, an image of the effect button 41 rotating is displayed.

In addition, after the pre-button effect voice to notify the start of the button effect is output at the timing from the pre-fade notification to the button fade-in, a press-guiding voice such as "Press the button" is output with a button press-guiding image. Output after the start of display. Furthermore, as a volume increase effect, a ``background change sound'' is output from the speaker during a ``black background'' scene, and a ``fade-in sound'' is output from the speaker while a fade-in image is displayed.

Regarding the content of the pre-fade notification, when a blackout occurs, a production button image, an image that approximates the production button image, or a related image for deriving the production button image is displayed, and these images are replaced with the blacked out image. By displaying the image on the front side, the image display related to the operation effect is displayed more prominently (FIG. 43(m)). Thereby, the player can sense that the timing to operate the performance button 41 is coming soon before the fade-in image of the performance button image and the operation button image is actually displayed.

Here, it may be determined whether or not to execute the pre-fade notification depending on the reliability of the operation effect and the reach effect. For example, if the pre-fade notification is executed, the pre-fade notification is The probability that the subsequent operation effect will be successful than if it was not executed (if the operation result indicates that the change is a hit, success = jackpot notification; otherwise, the operation effect is As a result, an effect suggesting a predetermined degree of reliability is executed) may be configured to be high. Furthermore, it may be configured such that when the pre-fade notification is executed, the subsequent operation effect is always successful.

In addition, by blacking out the background during the pre-fade notification as described above, the visibility of the scene image on the screen is reduced, and the pre-fade notification can be executed using the entire LCD screen. Although it is possible to direct the person's awareness and attention from the scene image to the pre-fade notification, it is also possible to make the pre-fade notification more noticeable by implementing a screen mode other than blackout (black background). The screen appearance is more conspicuous (at least the scene It is sufficient if the display priority is set higher than that of images).

Further, regarding the voice before the button performance, any voice content that suggests the appearance of the operation performance to be executed thereafter may be used. Furthermore, the reliability may be made to differ depending on the content of the voice before the button performance, for example, voice content with a high possibility that the subsequent operation performance will be successful and voice content with a low possibility of success may be prepared and played back. The reliability of the operation performance may be suggested based on the voice content. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if there are multiple operation buttons used in operation effects, a voice with a high possibility of deriving a highly reliable operation button or a highly reliable operation button may be derived. You may also prepare voices that are unlikely.

Furthermore, as a mode of pre-fade notification, the content of the pre-button production voice that is executed at approximately the same time may be displayed as a line. In this case, unlike the telop that is displayed during reach, the dialogue that is the content of the voice being played may be displayed as text in a larger format that uses the entire liquid crystal screen.

In addition, the configuration is such that the scene is switched while the pre-fade notification is being executed, but in this case, the scene switching is executed in a display layer that has a lower display priority than the pre-fade notification, so it does not cause any discomfort to the player. , the scene can be switched while pre-fade notification is in progress. In that case, the changing scene image may be configured to be visible to the player. For example, by executing a blackout effect with a certain degree of transparency as a pre-fade notification, during the blackout, the back side of the scene image may be viewed. The configuration may be such that the manner in which the scene images are switched can be visually recognized. As a result, the interest of the performance can be improved by pre-fade notification, and the player can also visually confirm the switching of scene images, so they can grasp the connection between scene images, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort. It becomes possible to perform performances that are not possible before.

In addition, by configuring the scene image to progress on the back side of the pre-fade notification in this way, even if the reach effect is executed in a pattern that does not execute the pre-fade notification, the appearance will be Since the content of the performance progresses as the scene image progresses, it is possible to execute the ready-to-win performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort. In this way, by switching the scene images during execution of the pre-fade notification, or by advancing the content of the scene images without switching, it is possible to achieve the effects described above.

If the production button 41 is pressed during the valid operation period, the valid operation period ends, the "main character waves the flag" scene (Fig. 43 (p)) starts, and the button press guidance image etc. is removed from the screen. faded out. Furthermore, after the main character's voice regarding the re-drawing of symbols is output, a "flag waving sound" is output as a volume increase effect.

From the end of the "main character waving the flag" scene to the beginning of the "golden effect", after the effect pattern 120 that is changing again is enlarged and displayed (93s to 94s), as shown in FIG. 43(q), "7. 7.7", etc., and the game finally stops and is confirmed (95s to 98s). In addition, from the enlarged display of the effect pattern 120 to the final stop (93s to 95s), the effect button 41 vibrates due to the drive of the vibration device 72, and a "vibration sound" is output from the speaker (specified as a normal sound effect). (Special performance performed together with sound performance). This is an example of a jackpot notification performance (second special performance) that can notify that the stopped symbols are in a jackpot mode (specific mode). Note that this jackpot notification performance (second special performance) is different from the jackpot suggestion performance (first special performance) shown in FIG. 38 in that the normal sound performance ( The volume of BGM, vibration sounds, etc. from the speakers is relatively low. Furthermore, this jackpot notification performance (second special performance) has a longer performance time compared to the jackpot suggestion performance (first special performance) shown in FIG.

FIG. 43-2 shows the volume of the normal sound performance and the volume of the specific sound performance separately displayed for the period 92s to 96s in FIG. 43. As shown in FIG. 43-2, during the period from 93s to 95s when the vibration sound of the production button 41 is generated as a specific sound production, the volume of the specific sound production is the same as that of the normal sound production at the minimum volume level 3. It remains louder than the volume level. Specifically, the volume of the specific sound production at the time of 93s and 95s is higher than the volume of the normal sound production at the minimum volume level 3 and smaller than the volume of the normal sound production at the volume level 4, The volume of the specific sound performance at the time of 94s is higher than the volume of the normal sound performance at volume level 4, and smaller than the volume of the normal sound performance at volume level 5.

Next, reach effect B (high reliability of jackpot) shown in FIGS. 44 to 48 will be explained. Like the reach effect A shown in FIGS. 39 to 43, the reach effect B shown in FIGS. 44 to 48 also has an effect based on the theme of a battle between a monster and the main character, a kappa. In the early period of the reach effect (elapsed time 0s to 39s), the image effect and the corresponding normal sound effect are executed, and the specific sound effect (action sound) is not executed.

In this early period, the image production scene is "Reach title display" (Figure 44 (a)) → "Main character (Kappa) appears" (Figure 44 (b)) → "Repeat attacking and evading each other" (Figure 44 (a)) 44(c)) → "Monster defense" → "Monster counterattack" (Figure 45(d)) → "Friendly character" → "Monster avoidance" → "Monster counterattack" → "Mutual attack and defense" (Figure 45(e)) → The scene progresses in the order of "main character stands up" -> "monster stands up & attacks", and each scene consists of one or more cuts.

In each of these scenes, text captions are displayed as necessary. For example, in the "reach title display" scene (0s to 3s), a title caption such as "Monster VS Kappa" is displayed (Figure 44 (a)), and in the scene (4s to 13s) of "main character (kappa) appearance", the main character's dialogue is displayed. A telop (FIG. 44(b)) is displayed on each screen. Furthermore, the effect pattern 120 is displayed in a retreated position at the corner of the screen.

The reach title of this reach effect B is "Monster VS Kappa" like reach effect A, but the display format of the title caption is different from reach effect A (Figure 39 (a)), which has a low jackpot reliability. There is. In this way, the reliability may be suggested by the display mode of the reach title. Various embodiments have already been shown regarding the "reach title display" scene (FIG. 39) in the reach effect A, but all of these embodiments are also applicable to the reach effect B.

In addition, in the normal sound performance during the early period, a plurality of types of BGM are sequentially played according to the scene, and a sound (telop voice) corresponding to the telop displayed on the screen is also played. In other words, while the telop related to the reach title of "Monster VS Kappa" is displayed (0s to 3s), the telop voice reading out the reach title is displayed, and while the telop related to the main character's lines is displayed (4s to 13s, 35s), the main character's voice is the monster's voice. Monster voices are output from the speakers while telops related to lines are displayed (22s, 28s, 38s to 39s), and ally voices are output while telops related to lines of friendly characters are displayed (26s).

In addition, in the example of FIG. 44, when switching from reach effect BGM1 to reach effect BGM2 (elapsed time 14 s), the BGM stop period ( The output stop period) is set, and at the timing when the reach effect BGM2 (second BGM) is executed, the scene changes from ``the main character (kappa) appears'' (first scene) to ``repeat attack and avoid each other'' (second scene). Changes are about to take place. Furthermore, during the BGM stop period, a "change sound" (a predetermined sound different from the first and second BGM) that emphasizes the scene change is output. Note that the BGM stop period may be a mute period in which no sound is output from the speaker.

In addition, in the normal sound performance during this early period, in addition to the telop voice corresponding to the telop, a reach performance voice corresponding to each scene of the reach performance is output, and a volume increase performance is executed at an arbitrary timing. For example, in a part of the scene (16s) where the characters repeatedly attack and evade each other, the monster's dialogue voice (monster voice) that is not displayed as a caption is output, and similarly, in part (16s) of the scene where the monster counterattacks, 23s), the monster voice is output, and in the "mutual attack and defense" scene, the ally character's ally voice is output in 29s, the monster voice is output in 31s, and the main character's voice is output in 33s. Here, in the scene of "attacking and defending each other" (Figure 45(e)), the main character and the monster appear on the screen, and the ally characters do not appear, but the voices of the main character, the monster, and the ally characters are heard. Audio is being output. That is, for ally characters (characters that are less important than the main character), only their voices, such as their lines, are output without appearing as images on the screen.

Also, for example, in the scene of "reach title display" (0s to 3s), "emphasis sound" is output in response to the voice of the reach title, and part of the scene of "protagonist (kappa) appearance" (6s to 8s, 12s, 14s), "action sounds" are output in response to the main character's various actions, and the above-mentioned "change sound" is output at the end of the scene, and in part of the "Monster Counterattack" scene (23s), , a "counterattack sound" is output in response to the monster's counterattack movement. In addition, in the reach effect A (FIG. 39), no emphasized sound is output during the "reach title display". In this way, reliability is suggested by whether or not a sound other than the telop voice corresponding to the telop display (other than BGM) is output while the telop of a reach title is displayed, or by the type of audio (including BGM). It may be configured as follows.

Note that during this early period, while the ally voice 1 is being output (20s to 21s), it is desirable to display the corresponding ally character as a scene image. In that case, it is desirable to also display a subtitle image corresponding to the voice. Regarding the telop image, the reliability of the reach effect may be suggested by changes in the display mode (display color, etc.). Of course, even if ally voice 1 is being output and the corresponding ally character is displayed as a scene image, the telop image may not be displayed.

In addition, when expressing a scene such that the corresponding ally character is not displayed in the scene image, such as when ally voice 2 is being output (29s), only the voice may be played and the subtitle image may not be displayed. . In this way, the expression of scene images and telop images (whether or not they are displayed, etc.) may be varied depending on the content of the voice to be reproduced. Further, even when the ally voice 2 is being output and the corresponding ally character is not displayed in the scene image, the telop image may be displayed. Originally, it is desirable not to display the caption image when the image of the corresponding ally character is not displayed, but when using the caption image to suggest reliability, it is recommended to display the caption image. may be configured.

In addition, in this embodiment, the expression method is changed as described above depending on the type of voice, but the method is not limited to this. For example, for a main character such as the main character, during voice output may be configured to always display both the character image (scene image) and the telop image, or either one of them. On the other hand, for characters that are less important than the main character, such as ally characters, the system is configured so that the character image (scene image) and/or the subtitle image are not displayed even when the voice is being output. You may. In this way, the presentation mode at the time of voice output may be configured to vary as described above, depending on the importance of the target character, the degree of contribution during reach, the display frequency, etc. Further, even for the same character, the performance mode may be changed as described above depending on the progress level and content of the reach performance. By configuring this way, if there is a character who speaks relatively frequently or a character who speaks relatively infrequently in a reach production, it is possible to respond by switching the scene image every time the voice of that character is played. There is no need to display characters, and the number of scene images can be reduced to make the production data smaller. Furthermore, when creating a scene image, it is possible to create a scene image with a high degree of freedom without being restricted by the output voice.

Furthermore, in a ready-to-reach performance, in a scene where a character outputting a voice utters a line for the first time, it is desirable to display the corresponding character in the scene image at the time of outputting the voice. Moreover, it is more preferable to display a telop image at that time. Further, at this time, the telop image may be changed in a manner according to the reliability. Also, when outputting the voice after that, it is not necessary to display the corresponding character in the scene image or display the telop image, and in consideration of the progress in reach production, for example, in the scene where the character appears, the above-mentioned It is desirable to configure it so that it has a performance mode like this.

Furthermore, when the corresponding character is not displayed in the scene image when a voice is output, it is desirable that other characters also not be displayed. This can prevent the player from being misled into thinking that the voice being output is the voice of a different character. In that case, it is desirable to display a background image or the like on the screen. Also, even if you want to display a character different from the character corresponding to the voice, for example, a different ally character will be displayed when the voice of an ally character is output, and a different enemy character will be displayed when the voice of an enemy character is output. It is desirable to display a character with the same attribute as the character who is playing the game, so that the contents of the lines are not confused between characters with different attributes, such as allies and enemies. On the other hand, when playing back the voice of an ally character, a character with a different attribute from the character corresponding to the voice may be intentionally displayed, such as displaying an enemy character. Depending on the situation, this may work more effectively. Furthermore, the attributes of characters with different attributes are not limited to enemies/allies, but include various things such as gender, good/bad people, and types of animals.

In the middle period of the reach variation (elapsed time 40s to 67s), in addition to the image production and the corresponding normal sound production, a specific sound production (operation sound) by the movable body production is performed. In this middle period, the image production scenes progress in the order of ``Main character setting'' → ``Button production effect background'' → ``Accessories effect'' → ``Rainbow effect'' → ``Monster falls down.''

First, in the "protagonist setting" scene (40s to 41s), after the monster's lines (monster voice) are output from the speaker, the main character's lines are displayed on the screen over the next "button production effect background". A telop is displayed and the main character's dialogue (main character voice) corresponding to the telop is output from the speaker.

Furthermore, when the "button production effect background" scene (42s to 48s) is started, a pre-fade notification is performed on the screen (FIG. 46(f)), and then a fade-in image of the production button 41 is displayed ( (FIG. 46(g)), then a button press guidance image and a gauge image are displayed, and the valid operation period begins (FIG. 46(h)). In addition, in the pre-fade notification, for example, an image of the effect button 41 rotating is displayed. Further, after a pre-button performance voice for notifying the start of a button performance is output during the pre-fade notification, a press guidance voice such as "Press the button" is output after the button press guidance image starts to be displayed.

In addition, in this reach effect B, blackout (black background) is not executed at the time of pre-fade notification, but similarly to reach effect A, blackout (black background) may be executed. Further, the reliability may be suggested based on whether or not blackout is executed or the type of screen aspect including the blackout. In addition, various embodiments have already been shown regarding the pre-fade notification in the ready-to-reach effect A, but all of those embodiments are also applicable to this ready-to-reach effect B.

In addition, during the pre-fade notification on the screen, a "pre-fade notification sound" is output from the speaker as a volume increase effect, and the rotating body 44 of the movable effect means 42 swings, and the third movable body 109 of the board rises. Operation sounds are emitted by the operation. At this time, since the "rattling" and other operational sounds caused by the shaking motion of the rotating body 44 are relatively loud, the volume level was changed from 3 to 7 from 42s to 44s when this shaking motion of the rotating body 44 was performed. The rate of increase, which is the rate of change in volume, is smaller than 1.2. On the other hand, since the movement sound of the third movable body 109 of the panel is about 50 dB, which is very small compared to the sound from the speaker, the rate of increase at 45 seconds when only the third movable body 109 of the panel operates is 1, which is the same as the non-specific period. .2.

Here, a pattern may be provided in which the rotating body 44 is not shaken during the pre-fade notification, that is, a pattern in which no operational sound such as "rattling" is generated. Further, instead of the rotary body, the first movable body 107 of the plate, the third movable body 109 of the plate, etc. may be vibrated up and down to generate the operation sound.

In addition, during the display period (46s to 48s) of the button press guidance image, a press guidance voice such as "Press the button" and a "press guidance sound" as a volume increase effect are output from the speaker, and the The third movable body 109 temporarily stops at a predetermined position, and the second movable body 108 swings and the rotating body 44 rotates. Note that at the time when the button press guidance image is displayed, the reproduction of the BGM is paused, and the press guidance voice etc. are output while the BGM is stopped.

If the effect button 41 is pressed during the valid operation period, the valid operation period ends and the button press guidance image etc. is faded out from the screen (49s to 50s). Further, in the subsequent "Rainbow Effect" scene (51a to 60s), for example, a rainbow effect in which the entire screen becomes a rainbow-colored gradation is executed.

Further, when the effect button 41 is pressed, the effect button 41 is vibrated by the drive of the vibration device 72, and a "vibration sound" is output from the speaker (from 49s). In this way, by causing the effect button 41 to vibrate when the player presses the effect button 41, the player can reliably recognize the vibration. Note that a vibration sound is generated by vibrating the production button 41 with the vibration device 72, but as mentioned above, the volume of the specific sound production changes when the player does not touch the production button 41 (the specific volume change operation is performed). When the player is touching or pressing the performance button 41 (when a specific volume change operation is being performed), the vibration device (driving means) 72 The driving of the effect button (predetermined part) 41 by the user is restricted, and the volume of the vibration sound is suppressed compared to a state where the effect button 41 is not touched. Therefore, by outputting a "vibration sound" from the speaker when the production button 41 is vibrated, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the volume of the actual vibration sound. Note that the "vibration sound" from this speaker may be output only during the vibration period (49s to 53s) of the production button 41, but in the example of FIG. 46, even if the vibration period of the production button 41 ends, After that, for a certain period of time (~56 seconds), "vibration sound" is continuously output from the speaker.

In addition, although various embodiments have already been shown regarding the vibration performance in the ready-to-reach performance A and the vibration sound output from the speaker performed in parallel thereto, all of these embodiments are also applicable to this ready-to-reach performance B.

Further, when the performance button 41 is pressed, the following post-operation performance is executed by the movable bodies 107 to 109 (49s to 54s). That is, the board third movable body 109 resumes its upward movement (from 49s), and when it reaches the maximum operating position, it waits at that position (from 51s). Subsequently, the first movable body 107 of the board starts to move downward (from 51s), reaches the maximum operating position, and is vertically integrated with the third movable body 109 of the board (53s), as shown in FIG. 46(i). An integrated performance of the movable bodies 107 to 109 is performed, for example, the second movable body 108 of the board performs a rotating operation (53s to 54s). Note that during this post-operation performance, a "movable sound" corresponding to the movement of the movable bodies 107 to 109 is output from the speaker as a volume increase performance. Note that at a predetermined timing after the production button 41 is pressed, the reproduction of the BGM after the button is pressed is started (from 52s).

When the post-operation effect (49s to 54s) ends, the first board movable body 107 and the third board movable body 109 each start moving to the origin position (FIG. 46(i)→(j)). At a predetermined timing during movement, the main character's voice corresponding to a successful button press is output from the speaker, and at the timing when each movable body 107, 109 reaches its respective origin position, the speaker outputs a "return to origin sound" as a volume increase effect. " is output.

In the "monster collapses" scene after the end of "Rainbow Effect" (61s to 67s), the dialogue of the monster just before it collapses is displayed as a caption on the screen, and the monster voice corresponding to the dialogue is output from the speaker, and Finally, when the monster falls down (FIG. 47(k)), the monster voice is output again, and a "falling sound" is output as a volume increase effect. Furthermore, when changing the scene from "Rainbow Effect" to "Monster Falls", the BGM will stop almost at the same time as the scene change, and after the BGM stop period, the new BGM will start playing later than the start of the new scene. It is about to start.

FIG. 48-1 shows the volume of the normal sound performance and the volume of the specific sound performance separately displayed for the period 42s to 61s in FIG. 46. As shown in FIG. 48-1, from 42s to 44s, in which the swinging motion of the rotating body 44 and the raising of the third movable body 109 of the board are performed as a specific sound production, only the raising of the third movable body 109 of the board is performed. During the period from 46s to 47s during which the rotary body 44 rotates and the second movable board 108 shakes, the volume of the specific sound production is set at all settable volume levels. The volume is lower than the normal sound production volume.

After that, at the time of 48s, the shaking motion of the second movable board 108 ends and only the rotating motion of the rotating body 44 becomes the specific sound production, so the volume due to the specific sound production becomes slightly smaller, but the normal sound production Also, since the BGM has stopped, the push-down guidance voice ends, and the volume suddenly decreases, the volume of the specific sound production is higher than the volume of the normal sound production at the minimum volume level 3, The volume is lower than the volume of the normal sound production at volume level 4 above.

Subsequently, during the period from 49s to 53s when the vibration sound of the production button 41 is generated, the volume of the specific sound production is maintained larger than the volume of the normal sound production at the minimum volume level 3. Specifically, the volume of the specific sound production during the period from 49s to 52s is higher than the volume of the normal sound production at the minimum volume level 3 and smaller than the volume of the normal sound production at the volume level 4, and the volume is lower than the volume of the normal sound production at the minimum volume level 4, The volume of the specific sound production at the time point is larger than the volume of the normal sound production at volume level 4 and smaller than the volume of the normal sound production at volume level 5. After 54 seconds after the vibrating sound of the production button 41 ends, the volume of the specific sound production is the normal sound production at all settable volume levels, except for 55 seconds when the volume of the normal sound production suddenly decreases. The volume is lower than the volume of

In the final period of the reach variation (elapsed time 68s to 98s), the image effect and the corresponding normal sound effect are executed, and the specific sound effect (operation sound) is not executed. In this final period, the image production scene is "Main character Banzai" → "Golden curtain" → "Golden effect" → "Golden effect & golden curtain" → "Golden effect" → "Golden curtain" → "Golden folding screen" ”.

In the scene of "Main character Banzai", after the production pattern 120 which is being displayed in retreat is enlarged as shown in FIG. 47(l) (68s to 73s), "4.4. It temporarily stops in a normal jackpot mode such as ``4'' (74s to 77s). Then, in the subsequent "Golden Curtain" scene, the BGM is changed, the production pattern 120 is covered and hidden by a golden curtain as shown in FIG. 47(n), and the "concealment sound" is " is output. In the "gold effect" scene, as shown in FIG. 47(o), a golden effect is executed in which the entire screen becomes golden, and the effect pattern 120 appears again and starts to change again (full rotation).

In the subsequent "Golden Effect & Golden Curtain" scene (82s to 89s), the production pattern 120 continues to fluctuate, and the production pattern 120 is concealed with a golden curtain (Fig. 48(p)) and hidden. The hidden state (FIG. 48(q)) is alternately repeated. Then, after passing through the "Golden Effect" and "Golden Curtain" scenes (90s to 93s), in the "Golden Folding Screen" scene (94s to 98s), the effect pattern 120 that is changing again is set against the background of the golden folding screen. After the enlarged display (94s to 95s), as shown in FIG. 48(r), the final stop is made in a normal jackpot mode such as "4, 4, 4" and confirmed (96s to 98s).

As explained above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the volume of the execution sound when the sound production is executed is determined depending on whether the volume is set to the first setting volume or the volume is set to the second setting volume. A non-specific period in which the ratio is a first volume ratio and a specific period in which the volume ratio is a second volume ratio smaller than the first volume ratio are provided, and during the non-specific period, a normal sound production is executed, but a specific sound production is not performed. During a specific period, a normal sound performance and a specific sound performance are performed. Further, the second set volume is the upper limit of the set volume that can be changed by the set volume changing means based on the volume adjustment operation by the player, and when the volume of the specific sound production is set to the second set volume. The volume is lower than the normal sound production volume during the specific period.

Further, based on the volume adjustment operation by the player, the volume level in the normal sound production is set to at least a first level, a second level that is louder than the first level, and a second level that is louder than the second level. a first volume level changing means that can change the volume level to a third level, and a second volume level changing means that can change the volume level without a volume adjustment operation based on the establishment of a predetermined condition; When the first volume level changing means sets the volume to the first level, the volume of the normal sound production is set to be more difficult to hear than the specific sound production, and when the volume is set to the third level The volume of the normal sound production is set so that it is easier to listen to than the specific sound production, and when it is set to the second level, when it is set to the first level and/or the volume of the third level is set so that it is easier to listen to. The second volume level changing means is set such that the difference between the volume due to the specific sound production and the volume due to the normal sound production is smaller than when the volume is set to the same level. The level is changed to the second level.

In addition, the volume of the execution sound when the normal sound production is executed is different between the normal gaming state and the special gaming state, and the volume level changing means can When set to the minimum volume level, the volume of the normal sound production is set to be more difficult to hear than the specific sound production, and when set to the maximum volume level, the volume of the normal sound production is set to be more difficult to hear than the specific sound production. The volume of the normal sound production is set so that it is easy to listen to.

In addition, there is a first special performance that can suggest the possibility that the stop symbol will be in a specific mode if a specific sound performance is performed during the execution of the normal sound performance, and a first special performance that can suggest the possibility that the stop symbol will become a specific mode when the specific sound performance is performed during the execution of the normal sound performance. It is possible to execute a second special performance that can notify that the stop symbol is in a specific mode when is configured so that it is relatively small. Furthermore, the performance time of the second special performance is made longer than the performance time of the first special performance.

In addition, the volume of the normal sound performance can be changed based on the normal volume change operation by the player, the volume of the specific sound performance can be changed based on the specific volume change operation by the player, and the volume of the normal sound performance can be changed based on the normal volume change operation by the player. The change can be executed even when the normal sound production is not being executed, and the volume change by the specific volume change operation can be executed only while the specific sound production is being executed. Further, the specific volume changing operation is a touching and/or pressing operation on a predetermined part, and it is possible to perform an operation guidance notification that guides the player to the specific volume changing operation while the specific sound production is being performed.

Further, the display effect execution means is capable of executing a display effect consisting of a series of moving images made by connecting a plurality of scenes, and the sound effect execution means is capable of executing a sound effect of outputting sound from the audio output means, During execution of the display performance, the sound performance execution means starts execution of the second sound performance after the execution of the first sound performance and after a mute period in which no sound is output from the audio output means, and the display performance execution means: The scene of the display effect is changed from the first scene to the second scene at the timing of executing the second sound effect. Further, after stopping the output of the first BGM, the sound production execution means starts outputting the second BGM after a BGM stop period, and the display production execution means changes the scene of the display production from the first scene at the timing of outputting the second BGM. It is now changed to the second scene. Further, during the BGM stop period, the audio output means outputs a predetermined sound different from each BGM.

In addition, it is possible to execute a specific notice while the symbol is being displayed, and the specific notice can be used for the first half of the period that does not yet indicate the possibility of a specific pattern, and the second half of the period that suggests the possibility of a specific pattern after the first half. has an audio output means capable of outputting audio related to the specific notice when executing the specific notice, and the audio output means outputs the audio related to the specific notice at a first volume when executing the first half section. , when the second half section is executed, the audio related to the specific notice is output at a second volume that is louder than the first volume. Furthermore, after the first half section is executed and before the second half section is executed, the audio related to the specific notice is output at a third volume that is lower than the first volume.

49 to 52 illustrate the second embodiment of the present invention, and show examples in which the volume level setting table in the first embodiment is changed and the adjustable range of the volume level is made different for each hall setting value. It shows. Note that portions not particularly mentioned in the following description are common to the first embodiment.

In the volume level setting table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, for the hole setting values (A value) T3 to T7 for the normal mode, the volume level The level changes by a predetermined step value, and the predetermined step value is different for each hole setting value T3 to T7, and the larger the hole setting value is, the larger the predetermined step value is. Further, the volume level corresponding to the minimum player setting value M1 is the same for all hall setting values T3 to T7. For example, the volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T3 is 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M5, and the predetermined step value in this case is 3. On the other hand, the volume levels corresponding to the hall setting value T7 are 3, 10, 17, 24, and 31 corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M5, and the predetermined step value in this case is 7.

In this way, in the volume level setting table of this embodiment, the first A value (for example, T3) is selected by operating the volume adjustment knob (A operating means) 140, and the first A value (for example, T3) is selected by operating the volume adjusting knob (O operating means) 39. When the 1st value (for example, M1) is selected, the first predetermined value (for example, 3) is set, and when the first value (for example, T3) is selected, the second value is greater than the first value. (for example, M2) is selected, the second predetermined value (for example, 6) is set, the second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and the first B value (for example, M1) is selected, the third predetermined value is set. When a predetermined value (e.g. 3) is set, a second A value (e.g. T4) is selected, a second A value (e.g. M2) is selected, a fourth predetermined value (e.g. 7) is set, and a fourth predetermined value (e.g. 7) is set. The amount of change between the predetermined value and the second predetermined value (for example, 3) and the amount of change between the third predetermined value and the fourth predetermined value (for example, 4) are made different, and the first A value (for example, T3) is selected. , if the current upper limit value (for example, M5) is selected, the first upper limit predetermined value (for example, 15) is set, the second upper limit value (for example, T4) is selected, and the upper limit value (for example, M5) is selected. For example, when M5) is selected, the second upper limit predetermined value (for example, 19) is set, and the first upper limit and the second upper limit are different, so the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated on the game hall side. By doing so, it is possible to change the adjustable range of the volume level by the player. Furthermore, since the first predetermined value and the third predetermined value are the same, it is possible to change the upper limit of the adjustable range of the volume by operating the volume adjustment knob 140.

Furthermore, while the volume of a normal sound production changes depending on the volume level setting, the volume of a specific sound production remains constant regardless of the volume level setting. When the first A value (for example, M3) is selected by the volume adjustment knob (A operation means) 140, the second A value (for example, T4) is selected by the volume adjustment knob (A operation means) 140. ) is selected, the volume of the normal sound performance is relatively higher than the volume of the specific sound performance.

In this embodiment, the initial position (default player setting value) is different for each hole setting value T3 to T7 for the normal mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 49, the initial positions for hall setting values T3 to T7 are M1 to M5, respectively, and the larger the hall setting value, that is, the higher the upper limit of the volume level, the higher the initial position. is also large.

The hall setting value T8 for the power saving mode is, for example, the same setting as the hall setting value T3, which has the smallest upper limit of the volume level among the hall setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode. Further, the hall setting value T9 for the power saving mode is set to be the same as the hall setting value T7, which has the highest upper limit value of the volume level, for example, among the hall setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode. The same applies to the initial position.

Furthermore, among the hall setting values T0 to T2 that are not normally selected on the game hall side, the sound volume level corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M5 is all 0 (silence) in the hall setting value T0 for silence. The hall setting value T1 is for presentation, for example, the volume level corresponding to the minimum level player setting value M1 is 1, and the volume level corresponding to other player setting values M2 to M5 is the same as the hall setting value T3, for example. It becomes. The hall setting value T2 is for factory shipment, for example, the volume level corresponding to the minimum player setting value M1 is 2, and the volume level corresponding to other player setting values M2 to M5 is, for example, the hall setting value T3. is the same as For example, the initial positions for the hole setting values T0 to T2 are all set to the minimum M1.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the volume level when outputting the error sound is set to the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall setting value at that time (in this case, the player setting value), regardless of the player setting value by the volume operation means 39. The volume level corresponding to M5) is set. In this way, the volume level of the error sound is always at the upper limit corresponding to the hall setting value at that time, and therefore cannot be changed by the player operating the volume control means 39. It is possible for a person to change the volume by operating the volume adjustment knob 140.

Further, in the case of this embodiment, since the initial position is different for each hole setting value as shown in FIG. 49, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed, the first Similar to the embodiment, both the volume level and the volume adjustment notification image PV change. For example, as shown in FIGS. 50(a) to (e), when the hall setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M1 (initial position), the hall setting value is set while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed. is changed in the order of T3 → T4 → T5 → T6 → T7, the volume level changes in order from 3 → 7 → 13 → 21 → 31 according to the initial position corresponding to the hall setting value after the change, and the volume is adjusted. The notification image PV also changes sequentially from PV1 to PV2 to PV3 to PV4 to PV5 in accordance with the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value.

51 and 52 show that FIG. 34 in the first embodiment has been modified according to the present embodiment, and the hall setting value (selected value) by the volume adjustment knob (second operating means) 140 is changed to the volume level. When the upper limit value is set to T7 (first selection value), which is the maximum, the player setting value (volume setting value) by the volume operation means (first operation means) 39 is set to M1 (first volume setting value) to M5. Figure 51 shows the volume change when the volume level is set to T3 (second selection value), where the upper limit of the volume level is the minimum. FIG. 52 shows changes in volume when the player setting value (volume setting value) is set to M1 (first volume setting value) to M5 (second volume setting value). As shown in FIG. 49, when the hole setting value is set to T3 (second selection value) and when it is set to T7 (first selection value), the player setting is better when the hole setting value is set to T3. The volume level (second corresponding volume level) when the value is set to M5 (second volume setting value) is small. Furthermore, the volumes corresponding to volume levels 3 (first corresponding volume levels), 10, 17, 24, and 31 (second corresponding volume levels) in FIG. The volume is set to be the same as the corresponding volume.

Comparing FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the lower limit value of the volume level (first corresponding volume level) is common, but the upper limit value (second corresponding volume level) is lower in FIG. 52, so the volume level is changed from the lower limit value. The increase rate (volume ratio), which is the rate of change in volume when changing to the upper limit value, is smaller in FIG. 52 (1.097) than in FIG. 51 (1.200). Furthermore, in both the case of FIG. 51 where the hole setting value is set to T7 (first selection value) and the case of FIG. 52 where the hole setting value is set to T3 (second selection value), the player When the setting value is set to M1 (first volume setting value), the volume of the specific sound production is higher than the volume of the normal sound production, and the volume of the specific sound production is easier to hear than the normal sound production. It becomes. Furthermore, in both the case of FIG. 51 where the hole setting value is set to T7 (first selection value) and the case of FIG. 52 where the hole setting value is set to T3 (second selection value), the player When the setting value is set to M5 (second volume setting value), the volume of the specific sound production is lower than the volume of the normal sound production, and the volume of the specific sound production is difficult to hear compared to the normal sound production. It becomes.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the first A value is selected by the volume operation means (O operation means) 39, the value is higher than when the first A value is selected using the volume adjustment knob (A operation means) 140. When the second A value is selected, the volume of the normal sound performance is relatively higher than the volume of the specific sound performance.

In addition, a volume control is provided on the front side of the main unit for changing the player setting value (volume setting value) regarding the volume level of the normal sound production to M1 (first volume setting value) and M5 (second volume setting value). A volume operation means (first operation means) 39 that can change the setting value is arranged on the rear side of the main body, and by setting it to any of a plurality of hall setting values (selected values), M1 (first volume setting A volume adjustment knob (second operating means) 140 that can change a first corresponding volume level corresponding to M5 (second volume setting value) and a second corresponding volume level corresponding to M5 (second volume setting value), and having a plurality of hall setting values. (selected value) is at least T7 (first selected value) and T3 (second selected value), which has a smaller second corresponding volume level corresponding to player setting value M5 (second volume setting value). The player setting value M1 (the second selection value) is set by the volume operation means 39 regardless of whether the hall setting value T7 (first selection value) or T3 (second selection value) is set by the volume adjustment knob 140. 1 volume setting value), the volume of the specific sound production becomes easier to hear compared to the volume of the normal sound production, and the volume adjustment knob 140 adjusts the hall setting value T7 (first selection value) and T3 ( Regardless of whether it is set to the player setting value M5 (second volume setting value) by the volume operation means 39, the volume of the normal sound production The volume of the specific sound production is configured so that it becomes difficult to hear.

FIGS. 53 and 54 illustrate the third embodiment of the present invention, and show an example in which the second embodiment is partially modified so that the initial position in the volume level setting table is the same between hall setting values. There is.

The only difference between the volume level setting table of this embodiment (FIG. 53) and the volume level setting table of the second embodiment (FIG. 49) is the initial position. That is, in the volume level setting table (FIG. 53) of this embodiment, the initial position is set to M5 corresponding to the maximum volume level for all hall setting values T1 to T9 except for silence. Regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, as in the second embodiment, regardless of the player setting value by the volume operation means 39, the maximum volume level (here, the maximum level) corresponding to the hall setting value at that time (the volume level corresponding to the player setting value M5).

In addition, in the case of this embodiment, since the initial position for each hall setting value is the same, if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed, the volume level changes but the volume adjustment notification is not displayed. The image PV does not change (unless it is changed from the initial position at the time the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated). For example, as shown in FIGS. 54(a1), (b) to (e), the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed with the hall setting value set to T3 and the player setting value set to M5 (initial position). When the hall setting value is changed in the order of T3 → T4 → T5 → T6 → T7, the volume level changes sequentially from 15 → 19 → 23 → 27 → 31 according to the initial position corresponding to the changed hall setting value. However, the volume adjustment notification image PV remains unchanged at PV5. However, if the player setting value has been changed to, for example, M1 at the time the volume adjustment knob 140 is switched from T3 to T4, not only the volume level but also the volume adjustment notification is displayed as shown in FIG. 54 (a2) → (b). The image PV also changes.

Note that when the initial position is the same for each hall setting value as in this embodiment, the initial position does not have to be a value corresponding to the maximum volume level. Further, the initial positions may be the same for some of the hall setting values (for example, the hall setting values T3 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode and the power saving mode), and the initial values of the other hole setting values may be different.

55 and 56 illustrate a fourth embodiment of the present invention, in which the second embodiment is partially modified so that the maximum volume level is different for at least some of the hall setting values in the volume level setting table. , shows an example where everything except the maximum volume level is the same.

The volume level setting table (FIG. 55) of this embodiment, like the volume level setting table (FIG. 49) of the second embodiment, has hall setting values in 10 stages from T0 to T9 by the volume adjustment knob 140, and volume operation. Volume level assignments corresponding to five levels of player setting values M1 to M5 by the means 39 are set, with hall setting values T0 for silence, T1 for presentation, T2 for factory shipment, and T3 to M5. T7 is for normal mode, and T8 and T9 are for power saving mode.

For the hall setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, the volume level increases as the player setting value increases from M1 to M5, but for the player setting value M1 to M4, the hall setting value T3 -T7, the volume level is the same at 20, 30, 40, and 50, whereas the player setting value M5 has a different volume level for each of the hall setting values T3 to T7.

As described above, in this embodiment, the maximum volume level is different for each hall setting value T3 to T7 for the normal mode, so by operating the volume adjustment knob 140, the upper limit of the adjustable range of the volume level can be changed. It is possible to do so. Moreover, in the case of this embodiment, since the volume levels other than the maximum volume level are common to the hall setting values T3 to T7, the advantage is that even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is changed, the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable when adjusting the volume. There is also.

In this embodiment, the initial position is different for each of the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 55, the initial positions for hall setting values T3 to T7 are M1 to M5, respectively, and the larger the hall setting value, that is, the higher the upper limit of the volume level, the higher the initial position is also large.

The hall setting value T8 for the power saving mode is, for example, the same setting as the hall setting value T3, which has the smallest upper limit of the volume level among the hall setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode. Further, the hall setting value T9 for the power saving mode is set to be the same as the hall setting value T7, which has the highest upper limit value of the volume level, for example, among the hall setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode. The same applies to the initial position.

Furthermore, regarding the hall setting value T0, the volume levels corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M5 are all 0 (silence). Regarding the hall setting value T1, for example, the volume level corresponding to the player setting value M1 at the minimum level is 10, the volume level corresponding to the player setting value M5 at the maximum level is 50, and the other player setting values M2 to The volume level corresponding to M4 is, for example, the same as the hall setting value T3. Regarding the hole setting value T2, for example, the volume level corresponding to the player setting value M1 at the minimum level is 15, the volume level corresponding to the player setting value M5 at the maximum level is 55, and the other player setting values M2 to The volume level corresponding to M4 is, for example, the same as the hall setting value T3. For example, the initial positions for the hole setting values T0 to T2 are all set to the minimum M1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as in the second and third embodiments, the volume level when outputting the error sound corresponds to the hall setting value at that time, regardless of the player setting value by the volume operation means 39. The maximum volume level (here, the volume level corresponding to the player setting value M5 at the maximum stage) is set.

Further, in the case of this embodiment, since the initial position differs for each hole setting value as shown in FIG. 55, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed, the second Similar to the embodiment, both the volume and the volume adjustment notification image PV change. For example, as shown in FIGS. 56(a) to (e), when the hall setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M1 (initial position), the hall setting value is set while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed. is changed in the order of T3 → T4 → T5 → T6 → T7, the volume level changes sequentially from 20 → 30 → 40 → 50 → 80 according to the initial position corresponding to the hall setting value after the change, and the volume level is adjusted. The notification image PV also changes sequentially from PV1 to PV2 to PV3 to PV4 to PV5 in accordance with the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value.

As described above, in the volume level setting table of this embodiment, the first A value (for example, T3) is selected by operating the volume adjustment knob (A operating means) 140, and the first A value (for example, T3) is selected by operating the volume adjusting knob (A operating means) 39. When the first A value (e.g. M1) is selected, the first predetermined value (e.g. 20) is set, the first A value (e.g. T3) is selected, and the second A value is greater than the first A value. When a value (for example, M2) is selected, the second predetermined value (for example, 30) is set, when the second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and when the first B value (for example, M1) is selected, the second predetermined value (for example, M1) is set. When the third predetermined value (for example, 20) is set, the second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and the second B value (for example, M2) is selected, the fourth predetermined value (for example, 30) is set, and the fourth predetermined value (for example, 30) is set. The first predetermined value and the third predetermined value are the same, the second predetermined value and the fourth predetermined value are the same, the first A value (for example, T3) is selected, and the upper limit B value (for example, M5) at that time is selected. If selected, the first upper limit predetermined value (e.g. 60) is set, the second A value (e.g. T4) is selected, and the upper limit B value at that time (e.g. M5) is selected, the second upper limit predetermined value (e.g. M5) is set. Since a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 65) is set and the first upper limit value and the second upper limit value are different, the upper limit value of the adjustable range of the volume can be changed by operating the volume adjustment knob 140. It is possible.

In addition, in the volume level setting table of this embodiment, the first A value (for example, T3) is selected by operating the volume adjustment knob (A operating means) 140, and the first When the upper limit O value (e.g. M5) is selected, the first upper predetermined value (e.g. 60) is set, the first A value (e.g. T3) is selected, and the first upper limit O value (e.g. M5) is 1. When the first A value (e.g. M4), which is a step smaller, is selected, the first predetermined value (e.g. 50) is set, the second A value (e.g. T4) is selected, and the second upper limit O value (e.g. M5) is set. When selected, the second upper limit predetermined value (65) is set, the second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and the second upper limit value (for example, M4) is one step smaller than the second upper limit O value (for example, M5). ) is selected, the second predetermined value (for example, 50) is set, the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value are the same, and the first upper limit predetermined value is set to be higher than the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value. is also large and smaller than the second upper predetermined value.

In addition, as in this embodiment, among the volume levels corresponding to the maximum player setting value (Otsu value), the minimum value corresponding to the hole setting value (specific A value) T3 to T7 in the normal mode is one step below the maximum. It is desirable to set the volume level to be equal to or higher than the maximum value corresponding to the hole setting value (specific instep value) T3 to T7 in the normal mode among the volume levels corresponding to the player setting values below, but it is not limited to this. .

Note that in this embodiment, drawings corresponding to FIGS. 51 and 52 in the second embodiment are omitted, but similar to the second embodiment, when the hole setting value is set to T7 (first selection value) In either case, when the hall setting value is set to T3 (second selection value), if the player setting value is set to M1 (first volume setting value), the volume of the normal sound production is In contrast, the volume of the specific sound production is large, and the volume of the specific sound production is easier to hear compared to the normal sound production. Also, in both cases where the hole setting value is set to T7 (first selection value) and when the hole setting value is set to T3 (second selection value), the player setting value is M5 (second selection value). 2 volume setting value), the volume of the specific sound production is lower than the volume of the normal sound production, and the volume of the specific sound production is difficult to hear compared to the normal sound production.

FIGS. 57 and 58 illustrate the fifth embodiment of the present invention, and show an example in which the fourth embodiment is partially modified so that the initial position for each hall setting value in the volume level setting table is the same. There is.

The only difference between the volume level setting table of this embodiment (FIG. 57) and the volume level setting table of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 55) is the initial position. That is, in the volume level setting table (FIG. 57) of this embodiment, the initial position is set to M5, which corresponds to the maximum volume level, for all hall setting values T1 to T9 except when there is no sound. Regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, as in the fourth embodiment, regardless of the player setting value by the volume operation means 39, the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall setting value at that time (in this case, the player's (the volume level corresponding to the setting value M5).

In addition, in the case of this embodiment, since the initial position for each hall setting value is the same, if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed, the volume adjustment knob 140 is adjusted as in the third embodiment. Although the level changes, the volume adjustment notification image PV does not change (unless it has been changed from the initial position at the time the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated). For example, as shown in FIGS. 58(a1), (b) to (e), the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed with the hall setting value set to T3 and the player setting value set to M5 (initial position). When the hall setting value is changed in the order of T3 → T4 → T5 → T6 → T7, the volume level changes sequentially from 60 → 65 → 70 → 75 → 80 according to the initial position corresponding to the changed hall setting value. However, the volume adjustment notification image PV remains unchanged at PV5. However, if the player setting value has been changed to, for example, M1 at the time the volume adjustment knob 140 is switched from T3 to T4, not only the volume but also the volume adjustment notification image is changed as shown in FIG. 58 (a2) → (b). PV also changes.

Note that when the initial position is the same for each hall setting value as in this embodiment, the initial position does not have to be a value corresponding to the maximum volume level. Further, the initial positions may be the same for some of the hall setting values (for example, the hall setting values T3 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode and the power saving mode), and the initial values of the other hole setting values may be different.

59 to 61, FIG. 61-1, and FIG. 61-2 illustrate a sixth embodiment of the present invention, in which at least some of the holes in the volume level setting table are partially modified from the second embodiment. Regarding the setting values, the volume level corresponding to each player setting value is common among at least some of the hall setting values, but the maximum volume level can be adjusted by varying the range of player setting values among the hall setting values. Examples of different levels are shown.

The volume level setting table (FIG. 59) of this embodiment corresponds to hall setting values in 10 stages from T0 to T9 by the volume adjustment knob 140 and player setting values in 10 stages from M1 to M10 by the volume operating means 39. However, the possible range of the player setting value differs depending on the hall setting value. Also, similar to the second embodiment, hall setting values T0 are for silence, T1 is for presentation, T2 is for factory shipment, T3 to T7 are for normal mode, and T8 and T9 are for power saving mode.

Regarding the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, the volume levels corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M10 are all the same, for example, from the volume level 5 corresponding to the minimum player setting value M1 to the maximum player setting value. The volume level changes by a predetermined step value (here, 9) up to the volume level 86 corresponding to the value M10.

On the other hand, regarding the possible range of the player setting value, the upper limit is different for each hole setting value T3 to T7, and the lower limit is common. That is, the lower limit of the range that the player setting values can take is M1 for each of the hole setting values T3 to T7, whereas the upper limit of the range that the player setting value can take is M6 for each of the hole setting values T3 to T7. ~M10. As a result, the upper limit values of the volume level for the hall setting values T3 to T7 are 50, 59, 68, 77, and 86, respectively, and the larger the hall setting value is, the larger the upper limit value of the volume level is.

In this way, in this embodiment, the volume level corresponding to each player setting value is made common for each of the hall setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode, and the upper limit of the range that the player setting value can take is different. Therefore, by operating the volume adjustment knob 140, it is possible to change the upper limit of the adjustable range of the volume level, and even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is changed, the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable when adjusting the volume. There is an advantage.

In this embodiment, the initial positions corresponding to the hole setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode are set at the upper limit of the range that the player setting values can take. That is, as shown in FIG. 59, the initial positions for hall setting values T3 to T7 are M6 to M10, respectively, and the larger the hall setting value, that is, the higher the upper limit of the volume level, the higher the initial position is also large.

The hall setting value T8 for the power saving mode is, for example, the same setting as the hall setting value T3, which has the smallest upper limit of the volume level among the hall setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode. Further, the hall setting value T9 for the power saving mode is set to be the same as the hall setting value T7, which has the highest upper limit value of the volume level, for example, among the hall setting values T3 to T7 for the normal mode. The same applies to the initial position.

Further, regarding the hall setting value T0, the volume levels corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M10 are all 0 (silence). Regarding the hall setting value T1, the volume levels corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M10 are all the same as those for the hall setting values T3 to T7, and the upper limit of the range that the player setting value can take is, for example, the hall setting value T3. It is M6, which is the same as in the case of . Regarding the hall setting value T2, the volume levels corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M10 are all the same as those for the hall setting values T3 to T7, and the upper limit of the range of the player setting value is, for example, the hall setting value T4. It is M7, which is the same as in the case of .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the volume level when outputting the error sound is set to the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall setting value at that time, regardless of the player setting value by the volume operating means 39.

Furthermore, in the case of this embodiment, since the range of player setting values differs for each hall setting value, the volume adjustment notification image PV is also different from the second to fifth embodiments. That is, as shown in FIG. 60, the volume adjustment notification image PV of this embodiment includes a plurality of (here, 10) volume display figures 151 to 160 corresponding to, for example, the maximum range M1 to M10 of player setting values. There is. The volume display figures 151 to 160 are formed, for example, in the shape of a vertical strip having a length according to the player's setting value, and are arranged in the left-right direction with their lower ends aligned, for example.

Each of the volume display figures 151 to 160 can be displayed in three types of display formats, for example, "white", "solid", and "grayed out". All of the figures 151 to 160 are displayed in one of three display modes. That is, as shown in FIG. 60, among the volume display figures 151 to 160, the volume display figure corresponding to a value outside the possible range of the player setting value (for example, in the case of the hall setting value T3, it corresponds to the player setting value M7 to M10). Volume display graphics 157 to 160) are displayed in a "grayed out" state, and among the other volume display graphics, a predetermined number of display formats (for example, a game In the case of the user setting value M3, the volume display figures 151 to 153) are set to "solid color", and the others (for example, volume display figures 154 to 156) are set to "white". Such a volume adjustment notification image PV shows not only the volume setting status (first information) by the player's operation, but also the possible range of the player setting value at that time (first information) and its maximum range (third information). information). Note that the volume display graphic corresponding to a value outside the possible range of the player setting value may not be displayed. In the following description, the volume adjustment notification image PV is distinguished as PVαβ using a value α indicating a range that the player setting value can take and a value β indicating the player setting value at that time. For example, the volume adjustment notification image displayed when the possible range of the player setting value is M1 to M6 and the player setting value is M3 is the volume adjustment notification image PV63 with α=6 and β=3. The volume adjustment notification image displayed when the possible value range is M1 to M10 and the player setting value is M10 is the volume adjustment notification image PVAA with α=A and β=A.

Further, in the case of this embodiment, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, both the volume level and the volume adjustment notification image PV change. For example, as shown in FIGS. 61(a) to (e), when the hall setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M6 (initial position), the hall setting value is set while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed. is changed in the order of T3 → T4 → T5 → T6 → T7, the volume level changes in order from 50 → 59 → 68 → 77 → 86 according to the initial position corresponding to the hall setting value after the change, and the volume level is adjusted. The notification image PV also changes sequentially from PV66 to PV77 to PV88 to PV99 to PVAA in accordance with the initial position corresponding to the changed hole setting value.

As described above, in the volume level setting table of this embodiment, the first A value (for example, T3) is selected by operating the volume adjustment knob (A operating means) 140, and the first A value (for example, T3) is selected by operating the volume adjusting knob (A operating means) 39. When the first A value (e.g. M1) is selected, the first predetermined value (e.g. 5) is set, and when the first A value (e.g. T3) is selected and the second A value is greater than the first A value, the first predetermined value (e.g. 5) is set. When a value (for example, M2) is selected, the second predetermined value (for example, 14) is set, and when the second A value (for example, T4) is selected and the first O value (for example, M1) is selected, the second predetermined value (for example, M1) is set. If a third predetermined value (for example, 5) is set, a second A value (for example, T4) is selected, and a second B value (for example, M2) is selected, a fourth predetermined value (for example, 14) is set; When the second A value (for example, T4) is selected and the third A value (for example, M7) that is larger than the second A value is selected, the fifth predetermined value (for example, 59) is set, and the first predetermined value (for example, 5) and the third predetermined value (for example, 5) are the same, the second predetermined value (for example, 14) and the fourth predetermined value (for example, 14) are the same, and the third value (for example, M7) is Since it is not included in the first selection range (for example, M1 to M6) that can be selected when the first A value (for example, T3) is selected, the player can It is possible to change the adjustable range of the volume level. Moreover, since the upper limit of the player setting value (Otsu value) that can be selected by operating the volume operation means (Otsu operation means) 39 is different between the hole setting values (specific A value) T3 to T7 in the normal mode, the volume By operating the adjustment knob 140, it is possible to change the upper limit of the adjustable range of the volume level.

61-1 and 61-2 are modified versions of FIG. 34 in the first embodiment according to the present embodiment, in which the hall setting value by the volume adjustment knob (second operating means) 140 is changed to the volume level. Figure 61-1 also shows the change in volume when the upper limit value is set to T7, which is the maximum, and the player set value by the volume operation means (first operation means) 39 is set to M1 to M10. FIG. 61-2 shows the change in volume when the hall setting value is set to T3, where the upper limit of the volume level is the minimum, and the player setting value is set to M1 to M6. As shown in FIG. 59, when the hall setting value is set to T3, the range in which the volume level can be changed by the volume operation means 39 is from 5 (first level) to 50 (second level) (second changeable). range), and when the hall setting value is set to T7, the changeable range of the volume level by the volume operation means 39 is 5 (first level) to 86 (third level) (first changeable range). It has become. Further, the volume corresponding to the range of volume levels 5 to 86 in FIG. 61-1 is made to be the same as the volume corresponding to the range of volume levels 3 to 7 in FIG.

As is clear from FIGS. 61-1 and 61-2, when the player setting value is set below M2 (volume level 14), the volume of the specific sound production is higher than the volume of the normal sound production, While the volume of the specific sound production is easy to hear compared to the normal sound production, if the player setting value is set to M3 (volume level 23) or higher, the specific sound The volume of the performance is low, and the volume of the specific sound performance is difficult to hear compared to the normal sound performance.

As described above, in this embodiment, the volume level of the normal sound effect, which is placed on the front side of the main body, is set to 5 (first level), 50 (second level), which is higher than that, and 50 (second level), which is higher than that. A volume operating means (first operating means) 39 capable of changing the volume level to a larger volume 86 (third level), and a range in which the volume level can be changed by the volume operating means 39, which is arranged on the rear side of the main body. The changeable range that can be changed by the changeable range switching operation is set to the hall setting value T7. , 5 (first level), 50 (second level) and 86 (third level), and 5 (first level) and 50 (when set to hole setting value T3). If the volume level of the normal sound production is set to 5 (first level), the volume level of the normal sound production On the other hand, if the volume of the specific sound production becomes easier to listen to, and the volume level of the normal sound production is set to 50 (second level) or 86 (third level), the specific sound The volume of the performance is configured to be difficult to hear.

FIGS. 62 and 63 illustrate the seventh embodiment of the present invention, and show an example in which the sixth embodiment is partially modified so that the initial position for each hall setting value in the volume level setting table is the same. There is.

The only difference between the volume level setting table of this embodiment (FIG. 62) and the volume level setting table of the sixth embodiment (FIG. 59) is the initial position. That is, in the volume level setting table (FIG. 62) of this embodiment, any of the player setting values M1 to M10 that can be selected by all the hall setting values (M1 to M6 in this case), For example, M6, which is the maximum value, is set as the initial position. As described above, in this embodiment, although the upper limit of the volume level is different for each hall setting value, the volume level corresponding to the initial position is the same for all hall setting values except for silence.

In addition, in the case of this embodiment, since the initial position for each hole setting value is the same, if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed, the volume adjustment notification image PV will change. The volume level does not change (unless it has been changed from the initial position at the time the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated). For example, as shown in FIGS. 63(a1), (b) to (e1), the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed while the hall setting value is set to T3 and the player setting value is set to M6 (initial position). When the hall setting value is changed in the order of T3 → T4 → T5 → T6 → T7, the volume adjustment notification image PV changes sequentially as PV66 → PV76 → PV86 → PV96 → PVA6, but the volume level corresponds to each setting position. It remains unchanged at 50. However, if the player setting value has been changed to, for example, M1 at the time the volume adjustment knob 140 is switched from T3 to T4, not only the volume adjustment notification image PV but also the volume adjustment notification image PV as shown in FIG. The volume level also changes.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 63(e1), (d) to (a1), when the hall setting value is set to T7 and the player setting value is set to M6 (initial position), the volume adjustment notification image PV If the hall setting value is changed in the order of T7 → T6 → T5 → T4 → T3 while the is displayed, the volume adjustment notification image PV will change in the order of PVA6 → PV96 → PV86 → PV76 → PV66, but the volume level will change depending on each setting. It remains unchanged at 50, which corresponds to the position. However, if the player setting value has been changed to, for example, M10 at the time the volume adjustment knob 140 is switched from T7 to T6, not only the volume adjustment notification image PV but also the volume adjustment notification image PV as shown in FIG. The volume level also changes.

FIG. 64 illustrates the eighth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the portion corresponding to the normal mode in the volume level setting table (FIG. 59) according to the sixth embodiment is extended to the entire volume level setting table. There is.

In the volume level setting table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, the hall setting values are in 10 stages from T0 to T9, the player setting values are in 10 stages from M1 to M10, and the hall setting values are in 10 stages from T0 to T9. All of them are for normal mode. Further, the volume level corresponding to the player setting value M1 to M10 is the same for all the hall setting values T0 to T9, and for example, from the volume level 5 corresponding to the minimum player setting value M1 to the maximum player setting value M10. The volume level is changed by a predetermined step value (here, 9) up to the corresponding volume level 86.

On the other hand, regarding the possible range of the player setting value, the upper limit is different for each hole setting value T0 to T9, and the lower limit is common. That is, the lower limit of the range that the player setting values can take is M1 for each of the hole setting values T0 to T9, whereas the upper limit of the range that the player setting value can take is M1 for each of the hole setting values T0 to T9. ~M10. As a result, from the hall setting value T0 to T9, the range of the corresponding player setting value widens by one step toward the upper limit value, and the corresponding upper limit value of the volume level also increases by a predetermined step value (9 in this case). There is.

Further, in the volume level setting table of this embodiment, the initial positions corresponding to the hall setting values T0 to T9 are set at the upper limit of the range that the player setting values can take. That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the initial positions for hall setting values T0 to T9 are M1 to M10, respectively, and the larger the hall setting value, that is, the higher the upper limit of the volume level, the higher the initial position is also large.

Also, regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, it is set to the maximum volume level corresponding to the hall setting value at that time, regardless of the player setting value by the volume operating means 39.

Further, in the case of this embodiment, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed, the volume level and the volume adjustment notification image PV are changed as in the case of the sixth embodiment (FIG. 61). and change together.

FIG. 65 illustrates the ninth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the initial position in the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment is common to all hall setting values.

In the volume level setting table (FIG. 65) of this embodiment, the initial positions corresponding to the hall setting values T0 to T9 are all set in common, and are set at M1, which is the lower limit of the range of possible player setting values. Regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, as in the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment, regardless of the player setting value by the volume operation means 39, the hole setting at that time set to the maximum volume level corresponding to the value.

Further, in the case of this embodiment, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed, the volume adjustment notification image PV changes as in the case of the seventh embodiment (FIG. 63). However, the volume level does not change (unless it has been changed from the initial position at the time the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated).

66 and 67 illustrate the tenth embodiment of the present invention, and the initial position in the volume level setting table (FIG. 64, FIG. 65) according to the eighth and ninth embodiments is set to one or more hall settings. An example is shown in which the hall setting values are common to each group of hall setting values.

In the volume level setting table (FIGS. 66 and 67) of this embodiment, a plurality of hall setting value groups each consisting of one or more consecutive hall setting values are formed, and the initial position is set for each of these hall setting value groups. The initial position is, for example, the smallest value among the upper limit values of the player setting values in each hole setting value group. For example, in the case of the volume level setting table shown in FIG. 66, three hall setting value groups T0 to T2, T3 to T5, and T6 to T9 are formed, and the initial position of each hall setting value group is, for example, M1, M4, It is set to M7. Similarly, in the case of the volume level setting table shown in FIG. 67, three hall setting value groups, T0 to T4, T5 to T8, and T9, are formed, and the initial position of each hall setting value group is, for example, M1, M6, It is set to M10.

Further, regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, as in the volume level setting table (FIGS. 64 and 65) according to the eighth and ninth embodiments, regardless of the value set by the player by the volume operation means 39. , is set to the maximum volume level corresponding to the current hall setting.

Note that setting the initial position as in this embodiment is applicable to all the embodiments described above or later.

FIG. 68 illustrates the eleventh embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which a power saving mode and a silent mode are added to the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment.

In the volume level setting table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the hall setting value is in 16 stages from T0 to TF, the player setting value is in 10 stages from M1 to M10, and the hall setting value is in 10 stages from T0 to T9. is for normal mode, TA to TE is for power saving mode, and TF is for silent mode. The settings for the normal mode are the same as the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment.

The hall setting value TA for the power saving mode (low) is, for example, the same as the hall setting value T0, which has the smallest upper limit of the volume level among the hall setting values T0 to T9 for the normal mode. Furthermore, the hall setting value TB for the power saving mode (middle) is set to be the same as the hall setting value T5, which has an approximately middle upper limit value for the volume level among the hall setting values T0 to T9 for the normal mode. . Further, the hall setting value TC for the power saving mode (large) is set to be the same as, for example, the hall setting value T9, which has the highest upper limit value of the volume level among the hall setting values T0 to T9 for the normal mode.

Furthermore, in the volume level setting table of this embodiment, apart from the hall setting values TB and TC, a hall setting value TD for the power saving mode (medium) and a hall setting value TE for the power saving mode (large) are provided. The setting of the hole setting values TD, TE differs from the hole setting values TB, TC only in the initial position, and the initial position corresponding to the hole setting values TB, TC is set at the upper limit of the range that the player setting values can take. On the other hand, the initial positions corresponding to the hole setting values TD and TE are set at the lower limit of the possible range of the player setting values.

In this way, a plurality of hole setting values having a common range of possible player setting values may be provided, and the initial position may be made different for each of these hole setting values.

FIG. 69 illustrates the twelfth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which a power saving mode and a silent mode are added to the volume level setting table (FIG. 64) according to the eighth embodiment.

In the volume level setting table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the hall setting value is in 16 stages from T0 to TF, the player setting value is in 10 stages from M1 to M10, and the hall setting value is in 10 stages from T0 to T9. is for normal mode, TA to TE is for power saving mode, and TF is for silent mode. The settings for the normal mode are the same as the volume level setting tables (FIGS. 64 and 68) according to the eighth and eleventh embodiments.

The hall setting value TA for the power saving mode (low) is, for example, the same as the hall setting value T0, which has the smallest upper limit of the volume level among the hall setting values T0 to T9 for the normal mode. Further, the hall setting value TE for the power saving mode (MAX) is set to be the same as the hall setting value T9, which has the highest upper limit of the volume level among the hall setting values T0 to T9 for the normal mode, for example. Furthermore, for the Hall setting values TB, TC, and TD for the power saving mode (medium), (large), and (extra large), three Hall setting values T2, T5 are selected at approximately equal intervals from the Hall setting values T0 to T9 for the normal mode. , T7.

FIG. 70 illustrates the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the initial position in the volume level setting table (FIG. 69) according to the twelfth embodiment is common to all hall setting values.

In the volume level setting table (FIG. 70) of this embodiment, the initial positions corresponding to the hall setting values T0 to T9 are all set in common, and are set at M1, which is the lower limit of the range of player setting values. Regarding the volume level when outputting the error sound, as in the volume level setting table (FIG. 69) according to the twelfth embodiment, regardless of the player setting value by the volume operation means 39, the hole setting at that time set to the maximum volume level corresponding to the value.

FIG. 71 illustrates a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the second embodiment is partially modified to separately provide a volume level setting table for error sounds. In the second to thirteenth embodiments described above, the maximum volume level at each hole setting value is used to output the error sound (and specific notification sound), but in this embodiment, the volume level for normal game sound is used to output the error sound (and specific notification sound). A volume level setting table for error sounds is provided separately from the level setting table. In the following description, the volume level of normal game sounds other than error sounds (and specific notification sounds) will be referred to as "normal volume level", and the volume level of error sounds (and specific notification sounds) will be referred to as "error volume level".

FIG. 71(a) is a volume level setting table used for outputting normal game sounds in this embodiment, and is the same as the volume level setting table of the second embodiment (FIG. 49) except for the settings for error sounds. .

FIG. 71(b) is a first example of the volume level setting table for error sound corresponding to FIG. 71(a). In the example of FIG. 71(b), the error volume level corresponding to all hall setting values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 71(a), and the maximum volume level (here, 31). For example, since the upper limit of the normal volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T3 is 15, the error volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T3 is set higher than that, 18, and also corresponding to the hall setting value T7. Since the upper limit of the normal volume level is 31, which is the maximum volume level, the error volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T7 is set to 31, which is the same as the maximum volume level.

FIG. 71(c) is a second example of the volume level setting table for error sound corresponding to FIG. 71(a). In the example of FIG. 71(c), similar to FIG. 71(b), the error volume level corresponding to all hall setting values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 71(a). The error volume level is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (31 in this case), but the fluctuation range of the error volume level (6 in this case), excluding the case of silence, is the player setting value 1 when the normal volume level is It is smaller (or smaller) than, for example, the maximum value (7 in this case) of the volume level differences of the steps. In addition, the fluctuation range of the error volume level, excluding the case of silence, is set to be smaller (or smaller) than the minimum value (in this case, 3) of the volume level differences of one step of the player setting value in the case of the normal volume level. You may.

FIG. 71(d) is a third example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 71(a). In the example of FIG. 71(d), the hall setting values T3 to T7 corresponding to the normal mode are divided into two groups, upper and lower, and the error volume level corresponding to the lower hall setting values T3 and T4 is the upper limit of the normal volume level. The error volume level corresponding to the upper hall setting values T5 to T7 is set to the maximum volume level. In the example of FIG. 71(d), the error volume levels corresponding to hall setting values (excluding silence) T1, T2, T8, and T9 other than the normal mode are all set to the maximum volume level.

FIG. 71(e) shows an example in which a volume level setting table for specific notification sound is provided separately from a volume level setting table for error sound. In this case, the volume level setting table for the error sound may be one of those shown in FIGS. It can also be used as a level. In the volume level setting table for specific notification sounds shown in FIG. 71(e), all specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level except in the case of silence.

Note that the volume level setting tables shown in FIGS. 71(b) to 71(e) are similarly applicable to the volume level setting table (FIG. 53) according to the third embodiment.

FIG. 72 illustrates a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the fourth embodiment is partially modified to separately provide a volume level setting table for error sounds.

FIG. 72(a) is a volume level setting table used for outputting normal game sounds in this embodiment, and is the same as the volume level setting table of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 55) except for the settings for error sounds. .

FIG. 72(b) is a first example of the volume level setting table for error sound corresponding to FIG. 72(a). In the example of FIG. 72(b), the error volume level corresponding to all hall setting values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 72(a), and the maximum volume level (here, 80). For example, since the upper limit of the normal volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T3 is 60, the error volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T3 is set higher than that, 72, and also corresponding to the hall setting value T7. Since the upper limit of the normal volume level is 80, which is the maximum volume level, the error volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T7 is set to 80, which is the same as the maximum volume level.

FIG. 72(c) is a second example of the volume level setting table for error sound corresponding to FIG. 72(a). In the example of FIG. 72(c), similar to FIG. 72(b), the error volume levels corresponding to all hall setting values are equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 72(a). The error volume level is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (80 in this case), but the fluctuation range of the error volume level (8 in this case), excluding the case of silence, is the player setting value 1 when the normal volume level is It is smaller (or smaller) than, for example, the minimum value (10 in this case) of the volume level differences of the steps. Note that the variation range of the error volume level, excluding the case of silence, is set to be smaller (or smaller) than the maximum value (here, 20) of the volume level differences of one step of the player setting value in the case of the normal volume level. You may.

FIG. 72(d) is a third example of the volume level setting table for error sound corresponding to FIG. 72(a). In the example of FIG. 72(d), the hall setting values T3 to T7 corresponding to the normal mode are divided into two groups, upper and lower, and the error volume level corresponding to the lower hall setting values T3 and T4 is the upper limit of the normal volume level. The error volume level corresponding to the upper hall setting values T5 to T7 is set to the maximum volume level. In the example of FIG. 72(d), the error volume levels corresponding to hall setting values (excluding silence) T1, T2, T8, and T9 other than the normal mode are all set to the maximum volume level.

FIG. 72(e) shows an example in which a volume level setting table for specific notification sound is provided separately from a volume level setting table for error sound. In this case, the volume level setting table for the error sound may be one of those shown in FIGS. It can also be used as a level. In the volume level setting table for specific notification sound shown in FIG. 72(e), all specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level except in the case of silence.

Note that the volume level setting tables shown in FIGS. 72(b) to 72(e) are similarly applicable to the volume level setting table (FIG. 57) according to the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 73 illustrates a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the sixth embodiment is partially modified to separately provide a volume level setting table for error sounds.

FIG. 73(a) is a volume level setting table used for outputting normal game sounds in this embodiment, and is the same as the volume level setting table of the sixth embodiment (FIG. 59) except for the settings for error sounds. .

FIG. 73(b) is a first example of the volume level setting table for error sound corresponding to FIG. 73(a). In the example of FIG. 73(b), the error volume level corresponding to all hall setting values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 73(a), and the maximum volume level (here, 86). For example, since the upper limit of the normal volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T3 is 50, the error volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T3 is set higher than that, 59, and also corresponding to the hall setting value T7. Since the upper limit of the normal volume level is 86, which is the maximum volume level, the error volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T7 is set to 86, which is the same as the maximum volume level.

FIG. 73(c) is a second example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 73(a). In the example of FIG. 73(c), similar to FIG. 73(b), the error volume level corresponding to all hall setting values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 73(a). The error volume level is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (86 in this case), but the fluctuation range of the error volume level (6 in this case), excluding the case of silence, is the player setting value 1 when the normal volume level is It is smaller (or smaller) than the volume level difference of steps (in this case, 9).

FIG. 73(d) is a third example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 73(a). In the example of FIG. 73(d), the hall setting values T3 to T7 corresponding to the normal mode are divided into two groups, upper and lower, and the error volume level corresponding to the lower hall setting values T3 and T4 is the upper limit of the normal volume level. The error volume level corresponding to the upper hall setting values T5 to T7 is set to the maximum volume level. In the example of FIG. 73(d), the error volume levels corresponding to hall setting values (excluding silence) T1, T2, T8, and T9 other than the normal mode are all set to the maximum volume level.

FIG. 73(e) shows an example in which a volume level setting table for specific notification sound is provided separately from a volume level setting table for error sound. In this case, the volume level setting table for the error sound may be one of those shown in FIGS. It can also be used as a level. In the volume level setting table for specific notification sounds shown in FIG. 73(e), all specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level except in the case of silence.

Note that the volume level setting tables shown in FIGS. 73(b) to 73(e) can be similarly applied to the volume level setting table (FIG. 62) according to the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 74 illustrates a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which the eighth embodiment is partially modified to separately provide a volume level setting table for error sounds.

FIG. 74(a) is a volume level setting table used for outputting normal game sounds in this embodiment, and is the same as the volume level setting table of the eighth embodiment (FIG. 64) except for the settings for error sounds. .

FIG. 74(b) is a first example of the volume level setting table for error sound corresponding to FIG. 74(a). In the example of FIG. 74(b), the error volume level corresponding to all hall setting values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 74(a), and the maximum volume level (here, 86). For example, since the upper limit of the normal volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T0 is 5, the error volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T0 is set to 14, which is higher than that, and also corresponding to the hall setting value T9. Since the upper limit of the normal volume level is 86, which is the maximum volume level, the error volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T9 is set to 86, which is the same as the maximum volume level.

FIG. 74(c) is a second example of the volume level setting table for error sound corresponding to FIG. 74(a). In the example of FIG. 74(c), similar to FIG. 74(b), the error volume level corresponding to all hall setting values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 74(a). The error volume level is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (86 in this case), but the fluctuation range of the error volume level (9 in this case) is the volume level equivalent to one step of the player setting value when the error volume level is the normal volume level. The difference is less than or equal to 9 in this case. Note that the variation width of the error volume level may be smaller than the volume level difference of one step of the player setting value in the case of the normal volume level.

FIG. 74(d) is a third example of the volume level setting table for error sound corresponding to FIG. 74(a). In the example of FIG. 74(d), the hall setting values T0 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode are divided into two groups, upper and lower, and the error volume level corresponding to the lower hall setting value T0 to T2 is the upper limit of the normal volume level. The error volume level corresponding to the upper hall setting values T3 to T9 is set to the maximum volume level.

FIG. 74(e) shows an example in which a volume level setting table for specific notification sound is provided separately from a volume level setting table for error sound. In this case, the volume level setting table for the error sound may be one of those shown in FIGS. It can also be used as a level. In the volume level setting table for specific notification sounds shown in FIG. 74(e), all specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level.

Note that the volume level setting tables shown in FIGS. 74(b) to 74(e) are similarly applicable to the volume level setting tables (FIGS. 65 to 67) according to the ninth and tenth embodiments. .

FIG. 75 illustrates an 18th embodiment of the present invention, showing an example in which the 11th embodiment is partially modified to separately provide a volume level setting table for error sounds.

FIG. 75(a) is a volume level setting table used for outputting normal game sounds in this embodiment, and is the same as the volume level setting table of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 68) except for the settings for error sounds. .

FIG. 75(b) is a first example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 75(a). In the example of FIG. 75(b), the error volume level corresponding to all hall setting values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 75(a), and the maximum volume level (here, 86). For example, since the upper limit of the normal volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T0 is 5, the error volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T0 is set to 14, which is higher than that, and also corresponding to the hall setting value T9. Since the upper limit of the normal volume level is 86, which is the maximum volume level, the error volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T9 is set to 86, which is the same as the maximum volume level.

FIG. 75(c) is a second example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 75(a). In the example of FIG. 75(c), similar to FIG. 75(b), the error volume levels corresponding to all hall setting values are equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 75(a). The error volume level is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (86 in this case), but the fluctuation range of the error volume level (9 in this case), excluding the case of silence, is the player setting value 1 when the normal volume level is The volume level difference is equal to or less than the step (9 in this case). Note that the variation range of the error volume level, excluding the case of silence, may be smaller than the volume level difference of one step of the player setting value in the case of the normal volume level.

FIG. 75(d) is a third example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 75(a). In the example of FIG. 75(d), the Hall setting values T0 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode and the Hall setting values TA to TE corresponding to the power saving mode are divided into two groups, upper and lower, respectively, and the Hall setting values on the lower side correspond to the lower Hall setting values. The error volume level is set to the upper limit of the normal volume level, and the error volume level corresponding to the upper hole setting value is set to the maximum volume level.

FIG. 75(e) shows an example in which a volume level setting table for specific notification sound is provided separately from a volume level setting table for error sound. In this case, the volume level setting table for the error sound may be one of those shown in FIGS. It can also be used as a level. In the volume level setting table for specific notification sounds shown in FIG. 75(e), all specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level except in the case of silence.

FIG. 76 illustrates a nineteenth embodiment of the present invention, and shows an example in which the twelfth embodiment is partially modified to separately provide a volume level setting table for error sounds.

FIG. 76(a) is a volume level setting table used for outputting normal game sounds in this embodiment, and is the same as the volume level setting table of the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 69) except for the settings for error sounds. .

FIG. 76(b) is a first example of the volume level setting table for error sound corresponding to FIG. 76(a). In the example of FIG. 76(b), the error volume level corresponding to all the hall setting values is equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 76(a), and the maximum volume level (here, 86). For example, since the upper limit of the normal volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T0 is 5, the error volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T0 is set to 14, which is higher than that, and also corresponding to the hall setting value T9. Since the upper limit of the normal volume level is 86, which is the maximum volume level, the error volume level corresponding to the hall setting value T9 is set to 86, which is the same as the maximum volume level.

FIG. 76(c) is a second example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 76(a). In the example of FIG. 76(c), similar to FIG. 76(b), the error volume levels corresponding to all hall setting values are equal to or higher than the upper limit of the normal volume level for each hall setting value in FIG. 76(a). The error volume level is set to a value that does not exceed the maximum volume level (86 in this case), but the fluctuation range of the error volume level (9 in this case), excluding the case of silence, is the player setting value 1 when the normal volume level is The volume level difference is equal to or less than the step (9 in this case). Note that the variation range of the error volume level, excluding the case of no sound, may be smaller than the volume level difference of one step of the player setting value in the case of the normal volume level.

FIG. 76(d) is a third example of the error sound volume level setting table corresponding to FIG. 76(a). In the example of FIG. 76(d), the hall setting values T0 to T9 corresponding to the normal mode and the hall setting values TA to TE corresponding to the power saving mode are divided into two groups, upper and lower, respectively, and the hall setting values on the lower side correspond to the lower hall setting values. The error volume level is set to the upper limit of the normal volume level, and the error volume level corresponding to the upper hall setting value is set to the maximum volume level.

FIG. 76(e) shows an example in which a volume level setting table for specific notification sound is provided separately from a volume level setting table for error sound. In this case, the volume level setting table for the error sound may be one of those shown in FIGS. It can also be used as a level. In the volume level setting table for specific notification sounds shown in FIG. 76(e), all specific notification sounds are output at the maximum volume level, except when there is no sound.

Note that the volume level setting tables shown in FIGS. 76(b) to 76(e) are similarly applicable to the volume level setting table (FIG. 70) according to the thirteenth embodiment.

FIGS. 77 to 79 illustrate the twentieth embodiment of the present invention, and show examples in which the contents of the jackpot determination process (FIGS. 20 to 23) of the first embodiment are changed.

In the jackpot determination process of the first embodiment, in one jackpot determination table, the lower limit of the jackpot determination value, the upper limit of the low-accuracy jackpot determination value, the upper limit of the high-accuracy jackpot determination value, and the small hit determination Although the lower limit of the value, the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the jackpot judgment random number have been defined, in the jackpot judgment process of this embodiment, the jackpot judgment value at low accuracy, the jackpot judgment value at high accuracy, and the small hit Each range of determination values is defined by a separate determination table.

That is, in the jackpot determination process of this embodiment, the low-accuracy jackpot determination table, the high-accuracy jackpot determination table, and the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 78 are used. Each of these determination tables is composed of lower limit value information for defining the lower limit value of each determination value and upper limit value information for defining the upper limit value. It is assumed that the ranges of the low-accuracy jackpot determination value, the high-accuracy jackpot determination value, and the small hit determination value in this embodiment are completely the same as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22).

The low-accuracy jackpot judgment table defines the range of jackpot judgment values when the accuracy is low, and the lower limit value information is the lower limit of the low-accuracy jackpot judgment value -1, and the upper limit information is the low-accuracy jackpot judgment value. Upper limit values for the determination values are set respectively. In addition, the range of the low-accuracy jackpot judgment value differs for each setting value (settings 1 to 6), but in this embodiment, the lower limit value is constant regardless of the setting value, and the upper limit value differs for each setting value. There is. Therefore, in the low-probability jackpot determination table, only the upper limit information of the lower limit information and upper limit information is composed of six types of values corresponding to settings 1 to 6.

The high-accuracy jackpot judgment table defines the range of jackpot judgment values when high-accuracy, and the lower limit value information is the lower limit of the high-accuracy jackpot judgment value - 1, and the upper limit information is the high-accuracy jackpot judgment value. Upper limit values for the determination values are set respectively. In addition, the range of the high accuracy jackpot judgment value differs for each setting value (settings 1 to 6), but in this embodiment, the lower limit value is constant regardless of the setting value, and the upper limit value differs for each setting value. There is. Therefore, in the high-accuracy jackpot determination table, only the upper limit information of the lower limit information and upper limit information is composed of six types of values corresponding to settings 1 to 6.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lower limit value of the jackpot determination value at low accuracy and the lower limit of the jackpot determination value at high accuracy are the same value (10000) (FIG. 22), but the low accuracy jackpot determination table and the lower limit of the jackpot determination value at high accuracy It is stipulated separately for the jackpot determination table.

The small hit judgment table defines the range of small hit judgment values, and the lower limit value information is set to the lower limit of the small hit judgment value - 1, and the upper limit information is set to the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. ing. In addition, since the range of the small hit determination value is common to all setting values (settings 1 to 6), in the small hit determination table, both the lower limit value information and the upper limit value information are composed of one value.

Next, the processing procedure of the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 77 will be explained. In the jackpot determination process (FIG. 77), a jackpot determination random number is first obtained (S161). Further, the address of the jackpot determination table corresponding to the probability state (low probability medium/high probability medium) at that time is obtained (S162), and lower limit value information is obtained from the address (S163). For example, if the probability is low, the address of the low probability jackpot determination table is acquired, and the lower limit value -1 of the low probability jackpot determination value is acquired as the lower limit information.

Next, the lower limit value information is compared with the jackpot determination random value obtained in S161 (S164). Then, if the jackpot judgment random value is larger than the lower limit value information (S165: Yes), the jackpot judgment random value may be within the range of the jackpot judgment value, so it will continue to be used as the upper limit information in the jackpot judgment value. The processing from S166 onwards regarding the comparison is executed. That is, after acquiring setting value data (any of 0 to 5) (S166), offsetting the setting value data and changing the address (S167), upper limit information, that is, low accuracy or The upper limit value of the jackpot determination value at high accuracy is acquired (S168).

In the case of the low-accuracy/high-accuracy jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 78, six types of upper limit information are provided corresponding to settings 1 to 6, so the setting value data (0 to 5) acquired in S166 For example, if the setting is 1, the first upper limit value information is obtained with offset=0, and if the setting is 6, the sixth upper limit value information is obtained with offset=5 (S167, S168).

When the upper limit information is acquired in S168, the value of the upper limit information is compared with the jackpot determination random number value acquired in S161 (S169). Then, if the jackpot judgment random number value is less than or equal to the upper limit information (the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value at low accuracy or high accuracy) (S170: Yes), the jackpot judgment random number is within the range of the jackpot judgment value. is determined, the jackpot determination result becomes a low-probability jackpot or a high-probability jackpot (FIG. 22), a jackpot determination flag corresponding to the jackpot determination result is set (S171), and the jackpot determination process is ended. For example, if the jackpot determination result is a low-accuracy jackpot, 5AH is set in the low-accuracy jackpot flag and the high-accuracy jackpot flag, and if the jackpot judgment result is a high-accuracy jackpot, only the high-accuracy jackpot flag is set. 5AH is set.

If it is determined in S165 that the jackpot determination random value is less than the lower limit information (S165: No), and if it is determined in S170 that the jackpot determination random value is greater than the upper limit information (S170: No) Since it is determined that the jackpot determination random number value is not within the range of the jackpot determination value, the process from S172 onwards regarding the small hit determination is executed. That is, first, the address of the small hit determination table is acquired (S172), and lower limit value information (lower limit of the small hit determination value - 1) is acquired from that address (S173).

Next, the lower limit value information is compared with the jackpot determination random value obtained in S161 (S174). Then, if the jackpot judgment random number value is less than or equal to the lower limit value information (S175: No), it is determined that the jackpot judgment random number value is not within the range of either the jackpot judgment value or the small hit judgment value, so the jackpot judgment result The winning result is a miss, and the jackpot determination process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot judgment random value is larger than the lower limit information (S175: Yes), the jackpot judgment random value may be within the range of the small hit judgment value, so the upper limit information ( The upper limit value of the small hit determination value) is obtained (S176), and the value of the upper limit information is compared with the jackpot determination random value obtained in S161 (S177).

Then, if the jackpot judgment random value is less than or equal to the upper limit value information (upper limit of the small hit judgment value) (S178: Yes), it is determined that the jackpot judgment random value is within the range of the small hit judgment value, so it is determined that the jackpot judgment value is within the range of the small hit judgment value. The judgment result is a small hit (Fig. 22), and for example, the small hit judgment flag is set to 5AH and the jackpot judgment process ends. However, if the jackpot judgment random value is larger than the upper limit information (upper limit of the small hit judgment value) If so (S178: No), it is determined that the jackpot judgment random value is not within the range of either the jackpot judgment value or the small hit judgment value, so the jackpot judgment result is a failure, and the jackpot judgment process is ended as it is. .

By the way, the jackpot determination process (FIG. 77) of this embodiment is similar to the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20) of the first embodiment, and is applicable to pachinko machines that are not equipped with a setting change function (that is, have only one setting value). is also possible. In other words, in this embodiment, the jackpot determination processing program is divided into a model that can change the setting value in multiple stages (multiple stages of setting values exist) and a model that is not equipped with a setting change function (the setting value is one stage). can be made common.

When executing the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 77 with a model not equipped with a setting change function, the jackpot determination table is configured as shown in FIG. 79. The difference between the low accuracy/high accuracy jackpot determination table (for setting 1 stage) shown in FIG. 79 and the low accuracy/high accuracy jackpot determination table (for 6 settings stages) shown in FIG. Among the six types of upper limit value information corresponding to , the upper limit value of the low accuracy/high accuracy jackpot judgment value is set in the upper limit information for setting 1, and the upper limit information for other settings 2 to 6. The only difference is that dummy data is set in (shaded area in FIG. 79).

In the jackpot determination process (FIG. 77) of this embodiment, set value data (any of 0 to 5) is acquired (S166), the address is changed using the set value data as an offset (S167), and the address (S168), but in the case of a pachinko machine with only one setting value, the setting value data is set to 0, so in S168, the offset = 0 and the first Since the upper limit value information is acquired, it is possible to normally execute the jackpot determination process.

In addition, in the jackpot determination table (for setting 1 stage) shown in FIG. 79, dummy data is set in the upper limit information for settings 2 to 6, so the data size is (for stages).

In the above embodiment, the sound effects emitted from the gaming machine include a first sound effect output from the speaker based on audio data and a second sound effect output as the driving means is driven. A volume changing means capable of changing the output volume of the first sound production to a first volume value or a second volume value having an output volume larger than the first volume value, and the volume is set to the first volume value. , an output volume emitted from the gaming machine when only the first sound production is executed, and an output produced from the gaming machine when only the first sound production is executed with the volume set to the second volume value. A volume difference between the volume and the volume is a first volume difference, and an output volume emitted from the gaming machine when executing the first sound production and the second sound production with the volume set to the first volume value; When the second volume difference is a volume difference between the output volume emitted from the gaming machine when the first sound production and the second sound production are executed in a state where the second volume value is set, The second volume difference is configured to be smaller than the first volume difference.

In addition, the sound effects emitted from the gaming machine include a first sound effect that is output from the speaker based on audio data, and a second sound effect that is output when the driving means is driven. a first volume changing means capable of changing the output volume of the first sound production to a first volume value or a second volume value having an output volume larger than the first volume value, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied; , comprising a second volume changing means for changing the output volume of the first sound performance to the second volume value without depending on a player's operation; so that the output volume of the second sound production is easy to hear, and at the second volume value, the output volume of the second sound production is difficult to hear compared to the output volume of the first sound production. It is configured.

Further, a display means capable of displaying a symbol variation game, and a gaming machine that changes from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the symbol variation game is in a specific manner,
The sound effects emitted from the gaming machine include a first sound effect output from the speaker based on audio data and a second sound effect output as the driving means is driven. a volume changing means capable of changing the output volume of the one-sound production to any one of a plurality of types; and a volume changing means capable of changing the output volume of the one-sound performance to any one of a plurality of types; In both the normal gaming state and the special gaming state, when the output volume is changed to the minimum output volume by the volume changing means, the output volume of the second sound performance is audible with respect to the output volume of the first sound performance. and when the output volume is changed to the maximum output volume by the volume changing means, the output volume of the second sound performance is configured to be difficult to hear compared to the output volume of the first sound performance. ing.

In addition, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game that is advantageous to the player when the result of a fluctuating symbol game is in a specific manner, as a sound effect emitted from the gaming machine, a sound output from a speaker based on audio data is used. There is a one-sound effect and a second sound effect that is output as the driving means is driven, and the volume changing means is capable of changing the output volume of the first sound effect to a plurality of set volumes by the player's operation. and a first sound production in which the output volume of the first sound production is relatively lower than the output volume of the second sound production, as a production that executes both the first sound production and the second sound production. When there is a specific production and a second specific production in which the output volume of the first sound production is relatively high with respect to the output volume of the second sound production, and the symbol suggests the possibility of the specific mode. When the first specific performance is executed and the symbol is in the specific mode, a second specific performance is executed, and even if the first specific performance is better than the second specific performance, When the output volume is changed to the minimum output volume by the volume changing means, the output volume of the second sound performance is easier to listen to than the output volume of the first sound performance, and the output volume is changed to the minimum output volume by the volume changing means. When the volume is changed, the output volume of the second sound performance is configured to be difficult to hear compared to the output volume of the first sound performance.

In addition, the sound effects emitted from the gaming machine include a first sound effect that is output from the speaker based on audio data, and a second sound effect that is output as the driving means is driven. and the output volume of the first sound effect is adjusted by the player's operation to a first volume value, or a second volume value that is larger than the first volume value, or an output volume that is larger than the second volume value. a volume changing means capable of changing to a third volume value; a volume changing range switching means disposed on the rear side of the gaming machine capable of switching a change range of the output volume by the volume changing means; and the volume changing range switching means , a first volume change range that includes the first volume value, the second volume value, and the third volume value, and a second volume change range that includes the first volume value and the second volume value and does not include the third volume value. a sound change range, at the first volume value, the output volume of the second sound production is easier to hear compared to the output volume of the first sound production, and the second volume value or the third volume The value is configured such that the output volume of the second sound performance is difficult to hear compared to the output volume of the first sound performance.

In addition, the sound effects emitted from the gaming machine include a first sound effect that is output from the speaker based on audio data, and a second sound effect that is output as the driving means is driven. a volume changing means which is arranged and can change the output volume of the first sound production to a first volume value or a second volume value having a larger output volume than the first volume value by operation of a player; an output volume selection means disposed on the rear side and capable of selecting an output volume of the first volume value and the second volume value; a second selection value in which the output volume of the second volume value is set to be smaller among the output volume of the first volume value and the second volume value; At the first volume value, the output volume of the second sound production is easier to hear compared to the output volume of the first sound production, and at the second volume value at the first selection value or the second selection value, , the output volume of the second sound performance is configured to be difficult to hear compared to the output volume of the first sound performance.

Further, as the sound effects emitted from the gaming machine, there are a first sound effect outputted from the speaker based on the audio data and a second sound effect outputted as the driving means is driven. and a second volume changing means capable of changing the output volume of the second sound production, wherein the first volume change means is configured to change the output volume of the second sound production while the first sound production is being executed. On the other hand, the second sound volume changing means is configured to be able to change the output sound volume only while the second sound production is being performed.

Further, a display means capable of displaying a symbol variation game, an audio means capable of outputting a sound, a display performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined display performance with the display means, and a predetermined display performance with the sound means. and a sound performance execution means capable of executing a sound performance, the display performance is composed of a series of moving images that connect a plurality of scenes, and the sound performance includes a first sound performance and a second sound performance. During execution of the display performance, the audio performance execution means executes the second sound performance after a mute period after the execution of the first sound performance, and the display performance execution means executes the second sound performance after the execution of the first sound performance. The means is configured to change the scene of the display performance at the timing of executing the second sound performance.

Further, in a gaming machine that includes a display means capable of displaying a symbol variation game and a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the symbol variation game is in a specific mode, during the symbol variation, the specific mode is displayed. It is possible to execute a specific notice that can suggest the possibility that the specific mode will occur, and the specific notice, when displayed on the display means, will not indicate the possibility that the specific mode will occur, and after the first half section. a second half indicating the possibility of the specific mode; and audio output means capable of outputting a sound related to the specific notice when the specific notice is executed; When executing the section, the audio related to the specific notice is output at a first volume, and when the latter half section is executed, the audio related to the specific notice is output at a second volume higher than the first volume. It is configured.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various changes can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, in the example of FIG. 33, the generation timing and generation period of the vibration sound are the same as those of the "collision variation sound", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the vibration sound may be generated at the time of a "collision" before the "color change", or may be generated at the same timing as the "color change". Further, the vibration sound may be generated when the arrow appears, or may be generated both when the arrow appears and when there is a collision and/or a color change. When generating vibration sounds at both the time of "arrow appearance" and the time of "collision" and/or "color change", the vibration time at "arrow appearance" is longer than at the time of "collision" and/or "color change". The respective vibration patterns may be made different, such as by making them shorter (or longer).

Furthermore, the type and/or output volume of the appearing sound may be varied depending on the changing color of the hold (reliability to be derived). In addition, when multiple types of appearance sounds and/or output volumes are provided in this way, the ease of holding changes (whether or not a predetermined reliability is derived, that is, the performance The degree of success) may also be made different. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect a subsequent result depending on the appearance sound at the time of appearance, and it can be used as a device to attract the player's attention.

In addition, when the output volumes of the appearing sounds are made to differ, the balance of the output volumes of the appearing sound, the inciting sound, and the collision change sound should be in the relationship shown in the explanation of FIG. 33 for all the appearing sounds with different output volumes. It is desirable to set this. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the reliability is relatively low (such as when the content of the derivation result is relatively low or a failure pattern that is not derived is selected), the output volume can be lowered to The relationship between (such as when a successful pattern is selected), the output volume may be configured to have the above-mentioned balance. In that case, for example, you may set (volume of appearance sound) > (volume of collision change sound or stirring sound). Since the contents can be varied, not only does the preview performance become more interesting, but the player can also select a trigger for switching his/her gaze at a more detailed timing. In other words, for a known player, it is possible to avoid changing the line of sight for a failure pattern as much as possible, and to switch the line of sight for a success pattern. Further, these are not limited to collision sounds, but can be similarly applied to agitation sounds and collision change sounds. In that case, it may be applied in the same way to all of these sounds, or to any one or more sounds.

In this way, the relationship between the volume of the appearing sound, the agitation sound, and the collision change sound is not limited to (volume of the collision change sound)>(volume of the appearance sound)>(volume of the agitation sound) as shown in FIG. By making the volume of the appearing sound (first volume) larger than the volume of the collision change sound (second volume), for example, (volume of the appearance sound)>(volume of the inciting sound)>(volume of the collision change sound). Alternatively, (volume of collision change sound)>(volume of stirring sound)>(volume of appearance sound) may be used.

In the example of FIG. 33, an image of an arrow is displayed when an emerging sound occurs, but it is not necessary to match the sound output timing and the image display completely; for example, an arrow image is displayed when an emerging sound occurs. Instead, the image of the arrow may be displayed after the appearance sound is generated, or the image of the arrow may be displayed when the stirring sound is generated. By placing the sound ahead of the image in this way, it is possible to first use the sound to switch the player's line of sight to the LCD screen, and then to show the player how the image changes in response to the sound. It is possible to further attract the interest of players who have shifted their attention to the game.

Further, the output volume of BGM may be lowered during at least part of the period of the hold change effect. As a result, it is possible to make the volume increase effects and vibration sounds, such as appearance sounds, stirring sounds, collision change sounds, etc., more prominent to easily attract the player's attention. In this case, the reduction rate of the BGM output volume may be made different between the first half and the second half of the performance. For example, the rate of decrease in the BGM output volume may be lower (the BGM output volume may be increased) in the latter half section than in the first half section, or vice versa. Further, when increasing the rate of decrease in the output volume of BGM, the sound may be muted.

In the example of FIG. 33, the cuts of the image presentation are not changed during the pending change effect, but the cuts may be changed midway through. By changing the cut division according to the scene, the characteristics of each scene can be maximized, and the players who have been shifting their eyes can concentrate on the performance without getting bored. In this case, the number of times the cut can be changed is arbitrary; for example, the cut can be changed for each scene of arrow appearance, approach, and collision, or one cut can be taken from the appearance of the arrow to the collision, and another cut can be taken after the color change. It can also be split into cuts.

Furthermore, the time allocation for each scene shown in FIG. 33 is arbitrary; for example, the time for an arrow appearance scene, an approach scene, and a collision scene may be different. In this case, the time setting is preferably (time of approach scene)>(time of collision scene)>(time of arrow appearance scene). This makes it possible to set a sufficient amount of time between when the player's eye is captured and when the result appears, and because the player organizes the information in his or her head between when the player's eye is captured and when the result is derived. You can set aside time for this. Alternatively, (time of approach scene)>(time of arrow appearance scene)>(time of arrow collision scene), and the same effect can be achieved in this case as well. Alternatively, (time of arrow appearance scene)>(time of approach scene)>(time of arrow collision scene) may be set. In this case, sufficient time can be set for the transition from the scene where the arrow appears to the scene where the arrow approaches (when it is stirred), so that the same effect as described above can be achieved here as well.

Furthermore, a predetermined effect image may be provided for the arrow image (an image that prompts a pending change), that is, the image that is the target of the appearance sound. In this case, the effect image may be made different for each scene, that is, at the time of appearance (timing of appearance), at the time of stirring (during stirring), and at the time of collision change (timing of collision or after collision). Further, the effect image may be configured on a different layer using image data different from that of the arrow image, or may be configured as a single image of arrow+effect. Furthermore, images from the appearance of the arrow to the collision or after the collision may be configured as a series of moving images. Furthermore, in contrast to the success pattern shown in Fig. 33, the failure pattern (suspended change failure pattern) is a series of moving images from the appearance until the arrow fades out to the edge of the screen without colliding, with an instigation in between. It may be configured as follows. Further, the display mode of the arrow image and the effect image up to a predetermined time point before the collision may be substantially the same or may be different depending on whether the collision is successful or unsuccessful. Further, depending on the type of images up to a predetermined time point before the collision, there may be cases where the pattern is likely to be a success pattern and cases where the pattern is likely to be the failure pattern.

The moving speed when moving the arrow image (image that prompts a pending change) may be changed from appearance to collision. In this case, the movement speed at the time of appearance (when the appearance sound occurs) and during the time of agitation (when the agitation sound occurs) is made slower, etc. The moving speed may be made different between. Of course, the movement speed may be made faster when stirring (when the stirring sound is generated) than when appearing (when the appearing sound is generated). In addition, by making the movement speed faster during a collision (when a collision sound is generated) than during an agitation (when the agitation sound is generated), it is possible to move between the time of agitation (when the agitation sound is generated) and the collision (when a collision sound is generated). The speeds may be different. Of course, the moving speed may be slower during a collision (when a collision sound is generated) than during an agitation (when an agitation sound is generated). In addition, by making the movement speed slower at the time of collision (when the collision sound is generated) than at the time of appearance (when the appearance sound is generated), it is possible to move between the time of appearance (when the appearance sound is generated) and the time of collision (when the collision sound is generated). The speeds may be different. Of course, the moving speed may be faster at the time of collision (when the collision sound is generated) than at the time of appearance (when the appearance sound is generated). Regarding the moving speed when moving the arrow image (an image that prompts a pending change), (at the time of appearance) > (at the time of collision) > (at the time of agitation), or (at the time of collision) > (at the time of appearance) > (at the time of agitation) It is desirable that the relationship be

When the arrow image appears at the same time or after the appearance sound is output, it is better to display it dynamically, after capturing the player's attention, it is possible to further increase the attention to the presentation and preview. . Similarly, when the collision change sound occurs, that is, at the timing of the pending change (reliability disclosure), the post-change pending image (image indicating reliability) is displayed at the same time as or after the collision change sound occurs. It is desirable to do so. Further, although it is desirable to dynamically display the arrow image (an image that prompts a pending change), it may be statically displayed.

In the example shown in Fig. 33, the screen is toned down (visibility suppressed) during the period from the start of the performance (arrow appearance scene) to the approach scene, but this tone down ends earlier than that (for example, when the approach starts). It may be at the time of the collision) or after the collision (for example, at the time of the collision). Further, tone down does not have to be performed. Further, in the example of FIG. 33, the effect button 41 is vibrated to generate a vibration sound when the collision change sound is output, but the vibration sound does not need to be generated.

The pending change effect shown in FIG. 33 is configured to execute an image effect in which an arrow flies toward the pending image as a pre-subject change effect, but the pre-pending change effect is not limited to this, and the character changes. The content is arbitrary, such as executing some action on the target retained image. In this way, even if the content of the pre-suspension change effect is different, the matters explained with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34 above can be applied in the same way.

Moreover, although FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 have explained the pending change effect as an example of the specific notice, the specific notice is not limited to the pending change effect. The matters explained with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34 are similarly applicable to any specific notice other than the pending change effect.

In the embodiment, a holding change effect shown in FIG. 33 is exemplified as an effect for causing a player who enjoys using a smartphone during a game to switch his/her gaze to the liquid crystal screen of a gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "eye-catching effect"). However, as shown below, eye-catching performances are not limited to this.

The reliability suggestion derived in an attention-grabbing performance may be configured to increase the possibility of a premium result (reliability result suggesting/notifying that the change is a hit). For example, other performances of the same type as the eye-catching performance (such as not outputting appearance sounds, etc.) are at least partially different from the eye-catching performance, and for example, the eye-catching performance is the suspended change performance shown in FIG. 33. In this case, the configuration may be configured such that the possibility that a premium result is derived is higher than in other pending change effects (other than those shown in FIG. 33). Further, the execution ratio between the case where the reliability suggestion derived in the eye-catching performance is a premium result and the case where it is not may be set to 100:0. Of course, the production that captures the eye is not limited to the pending change production, and can be any type of production, such as a step-up notice, a pseudo-continuation production, a timer production, a conversation notice, a reach-ten-pai notice, a moving body production, and an SP reach development production. In these cases as well, the relationship between the eye-catching effect and other effects of the same type as the eye-catching effect may be as described above.

It is desirable to perform an eye-catching performance at a stage when the expectation level of winning has increased to a certain extent, such as during reach fluctuations in normal times, when the expectation level of winning is relatively high. It is thought that the probability of success in shifting the eye line can be further increased by executing the eye-catching effect at a time when the player's level of interest in the effect or preview is increasing. For the same reason, the eye-catching performance may be performed before the reach change develops and moves to SP reach (specifically, before the title of SP reach is displayed) or during SP reach. good. Similarly, the execution probability of eye-catching performances will be higher after reaching than during normal fluctuations (not in a tense state), and during or after SP reaching than after reaching. It is desirable to configure

Further, the performance that grabs the attention may not be performed during the normal fluctuation (non-temperature state), but may be performed after the reach. Of course, on the contrary, an eye-catching performance may be performed during normal fluctuation (non-tempai state) and not performed after reaching.

In addition, the performance that steals attention may be configured so that the execution probability is higher during the normal gaming state than during the special gaming state such as the variable probability state, and in that case, the execution ratio is 100:0. You can. This is because the variable probability state is already an advantageous state for the player, and there is a high possibility that the player is already looking at the liquid crystal screen. However, conversely, the eye-catching performance may be executed during a special gaming state such as a variable probability state, and may not be executed during a normal gaming state.

In addition, the eye-catching performance may not be performed during normal fluctuations (non-tenpai state) and may be performed after the reach, or may not be performed during special gaming states such as probability fluctuation states, but during normal gaming state. It may also be executed during the Of course, on the contrary, a performance that steals attention may be executed during normal fluctuations (non-tenpai state) and not performed after reach, or it may be performed during a special gaming state such as a probability fluctuation state, and it may be performed during normal gaming state. You may choose not to execute some of them.

The eye-catching performance may be configured to be executed before the pseudo-continuous performance. Thereby, the pseudo continuous performance can be continuously shown to the player who has shifted his/her line of sight to the liquid crystal screen. In addition, the performance that steals attention may have a higher probability of execution before the pseudo-continuous performance (increasing the number of viable eye-catching performances) before the pseudo-continuous performance, and in that case, the execution ratio is 100:0. It may be. On the other hand, for eye-catching performances, the execution probability may be lower before the pseudo-continuous performance than after the pseudo-continuous performance (fewer viable eye-catching performances); in that case, the execution rate is It may be 0:100.

A performance that grabs people's attention is better than other premier performances (a performance that suggests a win) or rainbow effects (a performance that causes a lamp to emit light in a specific light pattern whose fluctuations indicate a win). may also be configured to be executed before. As a result, the player who has shifted his/her line of sight to the liquid crystal screen can continue to be shown the premiere effect or rainbow effect. Furthermore, the performance that grabs attention may have a higher execution probability before the premiere performance or the rainbow performance than after it, and the execution ratio in that case may be 100:0. On the other hand, for a performance that grabs attention, the execution probability may be lower before the premiere performance or the rainbow performance than after it, and the execution ratio in that case may be 0:100.

A plurality of eye-catching performances may be executed during normal fluctuation (non-tenpai state), after reach, or during SP reach. In that case, the plurality of performances may be of the same type (each may be a performance related to a pending change), or may be different types of performances or notices. In that case, the eye-catching effect may be executed multiple times in one variation, or may be executed only once in one variation. Further, the reliability may be higher when a single change is executed multiple times than when the process is executed only once.

As for the eye-catching effect, it is desirable to set it as a preview effect with relatively high reliability. For example, when executing a hold change effect as an eye-catching effect, the content may be configured such that content with a high degree of expectation (for example, red or higher) is more likely to be derived than other hold change effects. In addition, it is desirable to have a similar configuration not only for the pending change effect, but also when performing other previews as an eye-catching effect. It is desirable to carry out advance notice.

When executing a preview performance of the same type as the eye-catching performance (in this case, a pending change performance) before executing the eye-catching performance, content with relatively low expectations (for example, red or lower) may be It is desirable to configure it so that it can be easily derived.

In a single change, the performance that is executed before the performance that steals the eye is performed by other performances of the same type as the performance that steals the eye (such as not outputting the appearance sound, etc.). For example, if the eye-catching performance is a hold change effect shown in FIG. 33, a hold change effect other than that shown in FIG. 33 may be executed. This makes it possible to make the effects and previews different before and after the player's attention, thereby making the effects and previews more effective for the player.

Before the eye-catching effect, an operation effect such as a button effect may not be performed, and the operation effect may be performed after the eye-catching effect. Operation effects are effects that require the player to operate buttons, etc., so even if you suddenly perform the operation while the player is looking at a smartphone, etc., there is a low possibility that the player will respond to the operation, and a sufficient effect will not be obtained. That's because there isn't. Of course, the operation effect may be performed even before the eye-catching effect. In this case, for example, it is desirable to configure the operation performance after the eye-catching performance to be more reliable than the operation performance before the eye-catching performance.

When performing an operation presentation even before the eye-catching presentation, for example, in the operation presentation before the eye-catching presentation, the first operation presentation (as an operation guidance image to prompt the player to perform the operation) is A second operation effect (an operation effect using a relatively high-reliability PAT button image as an operation guidance image) is likely to appear in the operation effect later than the eye-catching effect. (An embodiment in which the shape of the button changes)) may be made easier to appear. In addition, in the operation performance before the eye-catching performance, only the first operation performance may appear, and in the operation performance after the eye-catching performance, the first and second operation performances may appear. It may be configured so that either one appears. As a result, before the eye-catching effect, only the first operation effect, which has a relatively low reliability, appears, so even if the player is absorbed in their smartphone and misses the operation effect, there will be little impact; After the stealing effect, the player is unlikely to miss whether the first operation effect or the second operation effect, which has a relatively low reliability, will appear, so the player plays the effect with a sense of tension. You can enjoy it.

When performing a manipulation performance even before a performance that steals the eye, for example, the number of manipulation performances that can be performed after the performance that steals the eye is greater than the number of manipulation performances that can be performed before the performance that steals the eye. It is desirable to configure the

As the eye-catching performance, a performance accompanied by an operation performance such as a button performance may be used. In this case, the operation effect may be executed after the appearance sound is output, and the structure may be such that the collision change sound or the like is output at a louder volume than the appearance sound at the timing when the player operates the operation means. You may.

In the eye-catching effect of the embodiment (FIG. 33), the player's attention is drawn by sound output, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may include lamp emission, vibration, air blowing, temperature change in a specific part, etc., or a combination thereof. It may also be configured to attract the player's attention. In that case, similar to the sound output relationship in the embodiment, the brightness of the lamp, the strength of vibration, the wind speed, the temperature of a specific part, etc. are changed in stages at the time of appearance, agitation, and change of collision. Good too. In that case, all of the sound output settings related to eye-catching effects described above can be replaced with lamps, vibrations, ventilation, temperature changes in specific parts, and the like.

The eye-catching performance may be executed only once during one change, or may be executed multiple times. By performing an eye-catching performance multiple times, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player will notice such a performance. Additionally, in that case, regarding a performance that grabs attention multiple times, it may be configured so that the reliability derived as a result of the performance performed later is higher than the reliability derived as a result of the performance performed first. desirable. Furthermore, the previous performance and the subsequent performance may be of the same type (for example, a pending change performance), or may be of different types.

When a player operates a smartphone during a game, the smartphone is often held slightly below the player's chest or near the top plate 33 or production button 41 of the gaming machine. It is thought that the line of sight is toward the bottom of the gaming machine. Therefore, in addition to the configuration of the embodiment, a lamp effect may be added to create an eye-catching effect. Regarding the lamp effects in this case, it is desirable to include, for example, a light emission effect (hereinafter referred to as a specific lamp effect) in which lamps around the lower part of the game machine emit light. Specifically, among the lamps around the performance button 41 arranged at the lower center of the gaming machine frame, the lamps near the upper tray 33, and the lamps arranged around the glass door 7 of the gaming machine frame, the lamps are especially arranged on the lower side. It is desirable to emit light from a lamp or the like. In addition, since the player operates the firing handle 35 with his right hand while playing, it is likely that he is holding the smartphone with his left hand, so it is possible to identify the player using the lamp placed on the left side of the gaming machine frame. It is considered effective to perform a lamp effect.

Further, it is desirable to execute the specific lamp effect at the timing when the execution of the eye-catching effect is started (in the embodiment, at the timing when the appearance sound is output). As a result, a player who is looking at a smartphone can check the specific lamp effect in his or her peripheral vision, making it possible to make the effect that steals the eye more effective. As described above, it is desirable that the specific lamp effect be performed at the same time as the effect starts, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific lamp effect may be performed during the effect. Specifically, it may occur after the appearance sound is output, during or after the inciting sound is output, or during or after the collision change sound is output. In this case, for example, the specific lamp effect is not executed at the output timing of the appearance sound (lamp effects other than the specific lamp effect may or may not be executed), and the subsequent collision change sound is output. A specific lamp effect may be executed at a certain timing (lamp effects other than the specific lamp effect may or may not be executed). As a result, in a production that steals attention, at least the first production means (audio output means) is used to produce the production at the start (when the appearance sound is output) (even if the liquid crystal image is used at the same time as in the embodiment). At the timing when the effect is actually derived (when the collision change sound is output), the effect is performed using the second effect means (lamp) in addition to the first effect means (as in the embodiment, the liquid crystal display is displayed at the same time). (It is preferable to use images), the player operating the smartphone can understand the content of the performance through the sound and lamp effects even while looking at the smartphone, and in one performance that captures the eye, It becomes possible to provide multiple timings for switching the line of sight to the LCD screen.

In addition to the above description, the first effect means and the second effect means are used at the start (when the appearance sound is output), and at the timing when the effect is actually derived (when the collision change sound is output). Either the first presentation means or the second presentation means may be used. Further, both the first presentation means and the second presentation means may be used at both timings. In that case, it is desirable to vary the light emission pattern in the specific lamp effect at each timing. In addition, the light emitting time of the specific lamp effect at the start (when the appearance sound is output) is relatively longer, and the light emitting time is longer for the specific lamp effect at the timing when the effect is actually derived (when the collision change sound is output). A pattern with a relatively short length may be used. Or vice versa. Furthermore, in addition to the light emission time in a specific lamp effect, the light emission color and light emission mode (blinking, lighting fade, light fade, etc.) may be varied.

When there are a plurality of performances that steal attention, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific appearing sound common to the plurality of performances is output. As a result, the player operating the smartphone only has to pay attention to that specific sound, which can reduce the burden on the player. Furthermore, it is desirable that the specific appearance sound in that case not be used in other preview performances. This makes it possible to execute a more sharp and easy-to-understand preview presentation. In addition, when performing lamp emission, vibration, ventilation, temperature change in a specific part, etc. in place of the output of the appearance sound or in addition to the output of the appearance sound, a specific light emission pattern or vibration pattern that is common among multiple performances may be used. , a ventilation pattern, and a temperature change pattern may be used.

In addition, when a common presentation mode is used among a plurality of presentations in this way, not only the appearing sound but also the stirring sound and the collision changing sound may be made common. In that case, all of these plurality may be made common, or only a part may be made common.

It is desirable that the output volume (dB) of the audio before the eye-catching performance is executed is low or muted. Thereby, it is possible to make the sound that appears when performing an eye-catching performance more prominent, and it is possible to enhance the effect as a gimmick to catch the player's attention.

It may be configured such that, before the execution of the eye-catching effect, an image effect that is a precursor to the eye-catching effect is executed. For example, the liquid crystal screen may be darkened by a visibility suppressing image at a timing before the appearance sound is output to express a different atmosphere than usual. As a result, it is possible to give players who are looking at their smartphones a sense of discomfort due to the LCD screen in their peripheral vision turning dark, and it is also possible to give players who are looking at their smartphones a sense of discomfort due to the LCD screen in their peripheral vision turning dark. , it becomes possible to express the feeling of anticipation for the upcoming preview performance in the form of a sense of discomfort. In that case, an image effect other than blacking out using the visibility suppressing image, for example, an effect displaying a predetermined effect image or character image may be performed. In addition, the arrow image referred to in the embodiment, that is, the image used in the eye-catching effect may also be used in the foreshadowing effect, but the arrow image is not limited to appearing first in the foreshadowing effect. It may be configured to perform another image effect that suggests that an image will appear.

When using a performance that has a success pattern and a failure pattern as a performance that grabs attention, a performance that outputs an appearance sound (or the appearance sound is relatively loud) and a performance that has a success pattern and a failure pattern will increase the possibility that the success pattern will be executed. In a performance that is configured so that the performance sound is high and has a success pattern and a failure pattern where the appearance sound is not output (or relatively small), the possibility that the failure pattern will be executed is high (at least compared to the case where the performance sound is output). The configuration may be such that the probability that the failure pattern is executed is high. Further, the configuration may be such that the success pattern is always executed when the appearance sound is output.

FIG. 80 shows two examples of desirable settings for various items before and after the eye-catching performance during one symbol change.

Before the eye-catching effect, the player's line of sight was directed at a smartphone, etc., which is different from the LCD screen, and after the eye-catching effect, the player's line of sight is directed toward the LCD screen. Regardless of the type of performance other than the performance that steals attention, it is generally considered more desirable to perform it after the eye-catching performance rather than before. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), general notices (step-up notices, pseudo-continuous notices, timer notices, conversation notices, etc.), highly reliable notices, appearance of manufacturer's patterns, vibration effects, ventilation effects, Trust derived from operation effects (single press effect, continuous press effect, long press effect), premiere effect, highly anticipated operation effect, eye-catching effect and other similar effects, blackout effect, eye-catching effect. Regarding preview performances that can be derived with higher reliability than the actual results, performances that have success and failure patterns, one-shot announcement performances such as fixed sound performances and rainbow performances, the appearance rate, the number of points (timing) that can appear, Regarding the probability of derivation (possibility that the performance will be executed in the derived part after the execution of a predetermined performance) (yes/no), it is generally higher after the eye-catching performance than before. It is desirable to set it as follows. Similarly, the average output volume is set higher after the eye-catching effect than before, the timing of the maximum output volume is set after the eye-catching effect, and the light emission frequency of the lamp effect is set after the eye-catching effect. It is desirable to set the maximum output lamp brightness to be higher at the back than at the front, and to set the timing of the maximum output lamp brightness after the eye-catching performance.

Furthermore, as shown by the arrow at the top of FIG. 80(a), among the fluctuation times of one fluctuation, the fluctuation time after the eye-catching performance is longer than the fluctuation time before the eye-catching performance. It is desirable to configure it as follows. This allows the player to spend more time paying attention to the liquid crystal screen, allowing the player to enjoy the liquid crystal presentation more meaningfully.

In this way, it is most desirable to use the settings shown in Figure 80(a) for the effects before and after the effect that steals the eye, but when considering the overall balance of fluctuations, the settings shown in Figure 80(a) for all effects are most desirable. It is not realistic to set it like this.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 80(b), effects that are assumed to be executed in the latter half of the change, such as highly reliable previews, appearance of manufacturer's patterns, premiere effects, and highly anticipated operation effects, appear as a general rule. Regarding the rate, the number of points (timing) that can appear, and the probability of derivation (possibility that the derivation will be performed in the derivation part after the execution of a predetermined performance), it is more or less (yes/no) than before the eye-catching performance. The latter is set to increase, but other general notices (step-up notices, pseudo-continuation notices, timer notices, conversation notices, etc.), vibration effects, air blow effects, and operation effects (one-shot effects, (repeated hit performance, long press performance), other performances of the same type as the eye-catching performance, blackout performance, preview performances that can derive higher reliability results than the reliability results derived from the eye-catching performance, success patterns and failures For performances with patterns, fixed sound performances, rainbow performances, and other one-shot announcement performances, the appearance rate, the number of points (timing) that can appear, the possibility of derivation (after the execution of a predetermined performance, that performance will be executed in the derivation part) Regarding the degree (possible/absent) of the possibility of being caught, it may be set so that it is more likely to occur before the eye-catching effect than after the effect. In addition, the average output volume is set higher before the eye-catching effect than after the eye-catching effect, the timing of the maximum output volume is set before the eye-catching effect, and the light emission frequency of the lamp effect is set before the eye-catching effect. The brightness of the maximum output lamp may be set to be higher in the front than in the back, and the timing of the maximum output lamp brightness may be set before the eye-catching performance.

In addition, in both FIGS. 80(a) and (b), among the fluctuation times of one fluctuation, the fluctuation time after the eye-catching performance is longer than the fluctuation time before the eye-catching performance. However, conversely, the variable time before the eye-catching effect may be longer than the variable time after the eye-catching effect.

Regarding the output volume of the sound emitted from the gaming machine, it is thought that outputting a louder sound will make the performance more interesting, so if the gaming machine is manufactured without certain restrictions, it may be difficult to There is a possibility that the audio output will be incorrect. For example, when one company's gaming machines are installed in a hall, the sound output is louder than the neighboring gaming machines of other companies. This is because it is thought that it can be made more conspicuous. However, if such competition is allowed, there will be problems such as noise problems in the hall, so certain limits are set on the output volume when manufacturing gaming machines. In order to perform sound production with more intonation and sharpness under such constraints and conditions in the production of gaming machines, it is possible to configure a production system that has a volume level transition as described in the embodiment. desirable.

The sound volume (dB) data shown in the embodiment is measured by picking up the sound emitted from the gaming machine with a sound collecting microphone. Therefore, these data are influenced to some extent by surrounding environmental sounds, and for example, in the embodiment, the volume does not reach 0 dB even in the muted state, and the data maintains a predetermined volume value. In this way, there is always some kind of environmental sound around a gaming machine, so when it comes to issues related to the volume of gaming machines, it is impossible to consider them separately from the surrounding environmental sounds. It is necessary to manufacture the device so that the volume emitted from the device is within a certain range. Conversely, even if you completely eliminate surrounding environmental sounds and measure purely the sound volume (dB) emitted by a gaming machine, the data obtained will not reflect the actual installation situation of the gaming machine or It is meaningless data that does not correspond to the usage situation at all.

Furthermore, regarding the sound emitted by the gaming machine, it is necessary to consider not only the sound output from the speaker but also the operation sound such as the vibration sound when the effect button or the like is vibrated, as shown in the embodiment. Recently, in particular, a wide variety of performances using movable objects have been carried out, and some of these include, for example, performances in which objects such as performance buttons are vibrated using a vibration motor, and performances using drive motors. There are also many performances that involve loud movement sounds, such as performances in which objects such as buttons are moved back and forth at high speed in predetermined directions, such as up and down, left and right, and a rattling sound is output. In these productions, the volume of collision sounds generated when moving objects such as production buttons collide with surrounding decorations and structures due to their movement has become louder, and the overall It is necessary to design a performance. Furthermore, while the volume of the sound output from the speaker (normal sound production) can be changed, the volume of operating sounds such as vibration sounds (specific sound production) cannot be changed, so there are multiple levels that can be set. It is necessary to construct a relationship between the volume level and the vibration volume, etc. so that there is a more optimal correspondence relationship for each volume level. The embodiment described above discloses an example in which a presentation system is constructed in a form that is considered to be more optimal.

In the embodiment, when the player touches or presses the vibrating performance button 41, the driving of the performance button (predetermined part) 41 by the vibration device (driving means) 72 is restricted, and the performance button 41 is activated. Although it has been described that the volume of the vibration sound can be adjusted compared to the state where no touch is made, the adjustment of the vibration sound as a specific sound production is not limited to this. For example, change the vibration width when a predetermined part such as the production button 41 is vibrated by the driving means such as the vibrating device 72, the speed (frequency) at which the vibration is executed, the frequency at which the vibration is executed, etc. The volume of the vibration sound, etc. may be adjustable by making it possible to change the vibration sound by operating a vibration sound adjustment operation means (switch/button, etc.). In this case, the vibration sound adjustment operation means may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine main body 1 so that it can be operated by the player, or on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1 so that only the hall personnel can operate it. may be provided. Further, the amount of adjustment may be changeable stepwise or steplessly (continuously), and furthermore, the amount of adjustment (adjustment level, etc.) may be changed on the front side of the gaming machine main body 1 so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can understand the amount of adjustment (adjustment level, etc.). It may be possible to display the information on a display means (liquid crystal display means 106, etc.) or on a display means on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1.

When the vibration sound can be adjusted by pressing the production button (predetermined part) 41 etc. with the hand, the amount of change in the vibration sound is configured to change according to the amount of operation (operation width), operation force, etc. You may. In this case, the volume may be changed stepwise or steplessly (continuously) depending on the amount of operation, operation force, etc.

When a vibration sound is generated as a specific sound production, the movable bodies of the other panels and frames may be configured not to operate. Further, after operating the movable body such as the board or frame, a vibration sound may be generated by the effect button 41 or the like.

The vibration sound as the specific sound effect may be generated at a timing other than that exemplified in the embodiment. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 41, after the button is pressed (49s), at approximately the same time as the rainbow effect is displayed on the LCD (for example, 51s), after the rainbow effect has finished displaying (for example, 61s), after the button is pressed (for example, at 51s), It may be executed while the liquid crystal display is in progress (for example, from 62s onwards). In addition, at that time, the system is configured to perform a vibration effect with a vibration pattern that corresponds to the progress of the LCD display (for example, vibrate in accordance with the attack motion of the main character or the motion of a monster falling), and generate a vibration sound. It's okay.

In the embodiment, when a specific sound effect (vibration effect, etc.) is not executed, there are two cases: when the volume is set to the first set volume (for example, volume level 3) and when it is set to the second set volume (for example, volume level 7). Although the rate of increase in volume (volume ratio) due to sound production is set uniformly (for example, 1.2) in , the rate of increase in volume due to sound production is not limited to this, and the rate of increase in volume when a specific sound production is not performed may be configured to vary. good. Even in that case, it is desirable to configure the system so that the rate of increase in volume is small when a specific sound effect is executed.

In the embodiment, the rate of increase in volume (volume ratio) due to sound production is approximately constant (for example, 1.2) when the player setting value is set to the minimum value in the selectable range and when it is set to the maximum value. However, it is only necessary that the rate of increase in volume (volume ratio) due to the sound effect at any two values in the selectable range of player setting values is approximately constant.

The rate of increase in the volume when the volume level is raised by one level may be configured to be different depending on the level of the volume level (ie, for example, in the case of 1→2 and in the case of 2→3). In that case, the rate of increase may be made different for every volume level, or only the rate of increase in some step changes may be made different from the rate of increase in other step changes.

When the upper limit of the volume level that can be changed by the player is allowed to be changed by hall personnel (for example, in the case of FIGS. 49 and 59), the volume of the normal sound performance is higher than the volume of the specific sound performance. The number of player setting values that make the sound difficult to hear (hereinafter referred to as the first player setting value number) and the volume of the normal sound production that is lower than the volume of the specific sound production and the sound of the specific sound production is audible. It is desirable to provide a hole setting value that is approximately the same as the number of player setting values that facilitate play (hereinafter referred to as the number of second player setting values). In that case, the first player set value number is greater than the second player set value number, and the first player set value number is greater than the second player set value number. Although it is desirable to provide both a hole setting value that is small, it is also possible to provide only one of them.

As shown in the embodiment, the rate of increase in volume during execution of the specific sound production may be varied depending on the timing of executing the specific sound production. In this case, it is desirable to configure the system so that the rate of increase at the timing of notifying the success or failure result is the smallest at the end of the reach.

The number of stages of the volume level that can be adjusted by the player's operations is not limited to five stages, and may be less than five stages, or may be six stages or more. Furthermore, even if the number of adjustable volume level levels is changed by the player's operations, there is no problem as long as the rate of increase in volume remains at the value described in the embodiment for the lowest level and the highest level.

If there are multiple vibration patterns in the vibration performance, the output volume of the vibration sound may be configured to differ depending on each vibration pattern. In that case, it is desirable to configure the structure so that the output volume of the vibration sound accompanying the vibration effect performed when notifying the success or failure result at the final stage of the reach is maximized. In addition, a vibration pattern that generates vibrations intermittently and a vibration pattern that generates vibrations continuously are provided, and although the volume of the vibration sound is the same, the former is better as a whole due to the pause period of vibration. The configuration may be such that the volume due to vibration is reduced.

A plurality of normal sound effects may be executed while the vibration sound is being generated as the specific sound effect. Further, each of the plurality of normal sound effects and the vibration sound as the specific sound effect may be executed during the same period or at the same timing. Further, the first normal sound effect may be executed while the vibration sound as the specific sound effect is being output, and then the second normal sound effect may be executed. Further, the first normal sound effect is executed while the vibration sound is being output as the specific sound effect, and the second normal sound effect is executed while the first normal sound effect is being executed. You may.

The normal sound performance may be configured to be executed before the vibration sound generated by the vibration performance as the specific sound performance is output. Further, the normal sound performance may be executed at substantially the same timing as the vibration sound output as the specific sound performance.

At the timing of starting the output of the vibration sound generated by the vibration production as the specific sound production, or during the output of the vibration sound, the normal sound production corresponding to the movement of the movable body is executed, and the subsequent predetermined sound production is performed. It may be configured to output different normal sound effects (eg, BGM after pressing a button) at different timings.

The BGM may be output after the button is pressed at the timing of starting the output of the vibration sound generated by the vibration performance as the specific sound performance or during the output of the vibration sound. In this case, it is desirable that the data of the BGM after pressing the button be created with the first half muted or with a low sound, and the volume of the BGM increases at a timing during or after the output of the vibration sound. Conversely, the volume of the first half may be high, and the volume of the BGM may be muted or low during or after the vibration sound is output.

Before the output of the vibration sound as a specific sound production starts, the reach effect BGM is stopped so that the volume (dB) of the normal sound production is relatively small, and after the vibration sound is output, the normal sound production is used. It is desirable to configure the system to output a sound different from the reach effect BGM so that the volume (dB) is relatively large. As a result, the volume (dB) is modulated before and after the vibration sound, making it possible to perform more effective audio production. In addition, in order to add intonation not only to the sound but also to the lamps, the lights are turned off or the light emission brightness and frequency are lowered before the vibration sound is output, and after the vibration sound is output, the lights are turned on or the light emission brightness and frequency are increased. may be configured.

It is desirable that each normal sound production be output using different reproduction channels among the plurality of audio reproduction channels.

Among the various sounds output from the speakers, a specific sound may be unaffected by volume adjustment by the player. In this case, the specific sound is not affected by the volume adjustment, so for example, if the volume level is set to the lowest level by the player's volume adjustment, the sound other than the specific sound output from the speaker will be set to the lowest level. The specific sound is output at a predetermined volume such as the highest level or middle level. With this configuration, it is possible to output the specific sound so that it is easier for the player to hear than other sounds, regardless of the volume level set. This specific sound is preferably used, for example, in a relatively reliable performance or in an eye-catching performance in the embodiment. As a result, even if the volume value is set at the lowest level, it is possible to easily recognize highly reliable performances and eye-catching performances by the player.

Furthermore, the volume of the specific sound may be set to be the same volume as the error notification sound. Further, when outputting a specific sound, sounds other than the specific sound may be muted or muted by, for example, being faded out to make the specific sound more prominent. Furthermore, the specific sound may be configured to be excluded from the fade-out process, mute, or soft sound when a sound with a relatively high priority is output. This makes it possible to prevent the specific sound from becoming difficult to hear even when the output of the specific sound and the audio production with a relatively high priority are executed in parallel. In addition, when performing error notification, it is desirable to configure the specific sound to be muted or low-pitched so as not to interfere with the error notification. Further, regarding the specific sound, it is desirable to set the volume to be easier to hear than the operation sound in the specific sound performance, such as vibration sound. Furthermore, if it is desired to make vibrational sound (operation sound in specific sound production) stand out as a performance expression, the vibration sound may be configured to be easier to hear than the specific sound.

In addition, as an example when outputting a specific sound in the above-mentioned eye-catching production (such as a holding change production), all sounds output in the eye-catching production should be treated as specific sounds so that they are not affected by volume adjustment. You may also do so. Further, only the appearance sound that is output when an arrow appears, etc. may be set as the specific sound. Further, only the collision sound when the arrow collides with the hold may be set as the specific sound. Furthermore, both the appearance sound and the collision sound may be set as the specific sound. In this way, by setting the series of sounds output as the preview sounds as specific sounds, it is possible to make the player reliably recognize the eye-catching performance. In addition, by specifying only particularly important appearing sounds and collision sounds as specific sounds, it becomes possible to have the player recognize the highly important sounds in a more pinpoint manner without becoming redundant.

In the embodiment, the rainbow effect is played from the accessory effect in one cut (for example, from 49s to 60s in FIG. 41), but the invention is not limited to this, and each may be played as separate cuts, or during the rainbow effect. It may also be configured to display a different rainbow effect by inserting a cut into the image. In this case, it is desirable that the rainbow effects before and after the cut change have similar or similar display modes.

In the embodiment, no cuts are made during the output of the vibration sound as a specific sound production, thereby making the player more aware of the vibration production and enhancing the production effect. It is also possible to insert cuts during output.

It may be configured to advance the production scene on the liquid crystal screen and switch cuts while the movable body is in operation, while stopping at the production position after the movement, or while returning from the production position to the origin position. Thereby, even when the movable body is in motion, the progress of the production scene can be made to proceed without stopping. Furthermore, by switching cuts, the content of the production scene changes while the movable body is in motion, making it possible to perform a production with more surprises. Furthermore, in this case, it is desirable to display different characters in the preceding and succeeding production scenes. Furthermore, the presence or absence of a character may be expressed using cuts, such as switching cuts and not displaying the character being displayed in the next scene. Further, this is applicable not only during the operation of the movable body but also during the execution of the operation performance. The operation effect can be performed before the operation button image is displayed, while the operation button image is displayed, and after the operation button image is finished being displayed, and the above contents are replaced with the operation effect. You may.

When performing the operation performance after the movement of the movable body, it is desirable to perform the operation performance after switching the cut of the performance scene at least once after the movement of the movable body is finished. As a result, after the movement of the movable body, the production scene progresses, and the player is able to understand the progress made as the production scene changes, and then execute the operation production. Since it is easy to understand the contents of the performance, and the composition of the performance can be understood in units of blocks, it is possible to proceed with a more interesting performance. Further, it is desirable to have a similar configuration not only when performing the operation performance after the operation of the movable body, but also when performing the motion performance of the movable body after performing the operation performance. In addition, the same configuration may be used when performing not only the movement of the movable body and the operation performance but also other performances. For example, a similar configuration can be adopted even when a cut-in notice indicating the reliability of the fluctuation or reach performance is executed before and after the movement of a movable body or before and after an operation performance. . Further, the mode may be changed depending on the content of the performance to be performed. In other words, when performing an operation effect after the movement of a movable body, a cut of the effect scene is performed during that time, but when performing an operation effect after a cut-in notice is executed, a cut of the effect scene is performed during that time. It may be configured so that it is not performed. As a result, by allowing the player to understand whether or not there has been a change in the performance scene after the predetermined performance has been executed first, it is possible to estimate the content of the subsequent performance of the predetermined performance. Note that the above-mentioned content is just an example, and the content of the previous predetermined performance and the content of the subsequent predetermined performance are not particularly limited. That is, what is important is not only the content of the notices before and after the notice, but also whether or not to execute the cut in the period in between.

Before executing the operation effect at the end of the reach, if you display the reach symbol (e.g. "7↓7") on the LCD and execute the effect that sequentially sends unconfirmed symbols (medium symbols), For example, while the symbols are being sent in the order of "717" ⇒ "727" ⇒ ... "757", you may switch the cut of the production scene being executed behind it, but "777" is the jackpot production mode. It is desirable that the cut of the production scene not be switched after a predetermined timing when the scene approaches. The predetermined timing is arbitrary; for example, it may be when the number "767" is reached, which is one place before "777" which is the jackpot effect mode, or at the start of the subsequent charging period (the output of the lamp and sound). (timing to lower the value). In addition, when performing an operation effect at the timing when "767" is reached, the cut of the effect scene may be switched until the effect button image fades in, and then it may not be switched. It may be configured so that it does not switch after the button image is displayed and the valid operation period has started, or the button ``767'', which is one step before the jackpot performance mode, may be configured so that it does not switch after the button image is displayed and the valid operation period has started. ” etc., the cut may not be switched at the start of the charging period (the timing at which the output of the lamp and audio is lowered) or thereafter. In this way, by allowing or restricting the cut switching of production scenes before, during or after executing specific preview productions such as symbol feeding or operation production, more crisp and easy-to-understand reach production is executed. It becomes possible to do so.

By changing the frequency of switching of production scenes based on cuts, it is also possible to execute a promotion production that determines whether or not a specific production will be executed. For example, as an incitement effect that incites whether the result of executing the operation effect is success or failure, the first scene (e.g., the protagonist's face) and the second scene (e.g., the monster's face) are alternately displayed at a gradually higher speed. By switching so that this occurs, the inciting effect may be executed until success or failure is determined. Furthermore, it is desirable that the production expressions be different between when the cuts are switched as an inciting effect and when the cuts are switched not as an inciting effect but as the progress of a production scene. Specifically, when switching cuts as an inciting effect, the first scene and second scene should be repeated alternately, so that the scene does not progress until the third scene. This can give the player the impression that the progress of the production scene has temporarily stopped at this point. On the other hand, when switching cuts for the purpose of progressing a production scene, if the first scene and second scene are repeated alternately, the player may misunderstand that the progress has stopped. Moreover, by performing such an expression at a timing when no particular incitement is required, there is no sharpness between the case where an incitement effect is really desired, and the effect expression becomes difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, in this case, it is desirable not to use expressions that alternately switch between similar scenes, or not to use them frequently.

A whiteout image or a blackout image may be inserted at the timing of switching cuts. Specifically, by switching from the 1st scene to the whiteout image to the 2nd scene, it is visually more difficult to understand due to the sudden scene change than when switching from the 1st scene to the 2nd scene. It is possible to reduce the In this case, there are three cuts including the intermediate scene (white image), but the length of the intermediate scene (whiteout) is shorter than the length of the first and/or second scene. This is desirable. This allows the player to understand that the first and second scenes are related to the reach effect, and the intermediate scene (whiteout) to be recognized as an image that is not directly related to the reach effect. It becomes possible to do so. In this way, there are scenes (first scene and second scene) that express the content of the reach effect, and scenes (intermediate scenes) that are executed to express the content of the reach effect in an easy-to-understand manner or to give an impact. , the execution length may be different, or the presentation mode of lamps and sounds during execution of the first scene and/or second scene and the intermediate scene (whiteout) may be made different. A lamp or sound may be provided that is output according to the execution of the intermediate scene (whiteout). Also, such expressions may be used during production, for example, repeating the switching of production scenes such as 1st scene ⇒ intermediate scene (whiteout) ⇒ 2nd scene ⇒ intermediate scene (whiteout) ⇒ 1st scene. You may also perform an inciting effect by doing so. Also, when the first scene and the second scene are repeated alternately, such as the first scene ⇒ intermediate scene (whiteout) ⇒ second scene ⇒ first scene, when switching from the first scene to the second scene. It may also be configured such that an intermediate scene (whiteout) is sandwiched only between.

The reliability of the reach effect may be configured to vary depending on the number of cuts. For example, a reach effect with many cuts may be set to have higher reliability than a reach effect with fewer cuts. As a result, players can judge whether or not the reach performance is something that can be expected by counting the number of times the cuts have been switched, so it is possible to judge whether or not the reach effect is something that can be expected by counting the number of times the cuts have been changed. , it becomes possible to enjoy reach performance. Also, you may purposely execute a reach effect that does not switch cuts at all, and in that case, if the reach effect that does not switch cuts is executed, the hit will be confirmed. The player can enjoy the reach effect while hoping that the cut will not be switched. In this way, by configuring multiple reach performances with different number of cuts and reach performances without cuts, it is possible to increase the interest of the entire reach performance and create a higher quality production system. It becomes possible to construct.

During a reach performance, if there is a specific performance that has a higher display priority (such as a notice indicating reliability or a notice of development of the reach performance), if there is a specific performance that is being executed in the background while that specific performance is being executed. It may be configured to advance the production scene of the reach production and execute cut switching. Also, while a specific effect is being executed, the image of the reach effect behind you may not be visible at all, or a visibility suppressing image (solid black) etc. may be superimposed on the reach effect to create a state where it is visible but difficult to see. Alternatively, the specific performance may be simply executed on top of the reach performance. It is desirable that the end timing of the execution of the specific performance is limited so as not to overlap with the cut switching timing of the ready-to-reach performance. This can prevent the inconvenience that the cut is switched immediately after the end of the specific performance, making it difficult for the player to understand the content of the ready-to-win performance. Further, the same can be said about the start timing of the specific performance. Further, it is desirable that the same character be displayed in the performance scene before and after the execution of the specific performance. As a result, during a specific production, the production scene changes by switching cuts, but since the same character is displayed before and after the specific production, it is possible to keep the production scene progressing while reducing visual clutter. . On the other hand, if more emphasis is placed on surprise, different characters may be displayed before and after a specific effect, or the character displayed in the previous scene may not be displayed in the subsequent scene.

In the embodiment, while the display effect is being executed, after the output of the first BGM is stopped (after the first sound effect is executed), the output of the second BGM (execution of the second sound effect) is started after a BGM stop period (output stop period). We have shown an example in which the scene of the display effect is changed from the first scene to the second scene at the timing of starting and outputting the second BGM (executing the second sound effect). The presentation and second sound presentation are not limited to BGM, but may be any sound presentation that outputs any sound such as a telop voice. Furthermore, after the execution of the first sound production until the start of the execution of the second sound production, there may be a mute period in which no sound is output from the speakers, and this may be different from the first sound production and/or the second sound production. It may also be possible to output a predetermined sound.

In the volume level setting tables (FIGS. 49 and 53) of the second and third embodiments, the predetermined step value is constant for each hall setting value for the hall setting values corresponding to the normal mode and the power saving mode. For example, the volume level corresponding to the player setting values M1 to M5 may be changed in a predetermined step value such as 3→4→6→9→13. Further, in the volume level setting tables (FIGS. 49 and 53) of the second and third embodiments, the volume levels of player setting values other than the minimum may be made the same among a plurality of hall setting values.

In the embodiment, the volume level of the error sound can be adjusted with the volume adjustment knob 140 but cannot be adjusted with the volume operation means 39. It may be configured such that the volume level cannot be adjusted.

Even if the volume level of the error sound (and specific notification sound) can be adjusted using the volume adjustment knob 140, the lamp light level level at the time of error notification may not be adjustable.

When the volume level of the error sound (and specific notification sound) can be adjusted with the volume adjustment knob 140, the specific type of notification sound (for example, RAM clear notification sound) among the error sounds etc. cannot be adjusted with the volume adjustment knob 140. (for example, always at the maximum volume level). Even if a specific type of notification sound (for example, RAM clear notification sound) cannot be adjusted with the volume adjustment knob 140, if the volume adjustment knob 140 is set to silence, the specific type of notification sound (for example, RAM clear notification sound) cannot be adjusted. The sound may be switched to silence or a predetermined low volume.

For example, in the fourteenth embodiment (FIG. 71), when the upper limit of the normal volume level is smaller than the maximum volume level, the error volume level is set higher than the upper limit, and the upper limit of the normal volume level is set to the maximum volume level. In the same case, the upper limit value (maximum volume level) is set as the error volume level, but the error volume level for at least some hall setting values may be set higher than the maximum volume level at the normal volume level.

In the various examples described above, a lower limit value may be provided for the error volume level so that even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated to the low side, the error volume level does not fall below the lower limit value.

The volume level of the error sound may also be configured to be adjustable using both the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume operation means 39. In that case, the volume level setting table for the normal sound may be applied as is to the error sound, or a volume level setting table for the error sound may be provided separately. However, even in this case, the lamp light intensity level at the time of error notification may not be adjusted by the player's operation.

Although the upper limit of the volume level differs for each hall setting value, the initial volume level (the volume level corresponding to the initial position) may be the same (FIG. 62). In this case, even if the initial volume level is the same, the display of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be made different by changing the initial position.

The upper limit value of the volume level corresponding to the hall setting value in the power saving mode may be any of the maximum value, minimum value, and intermediate value of the volume level in the normal mode.

The volume adjustment notification period is started not only when the volume operation means 39 is operated, but also when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated, and the volume adjustment notification image PV is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 106. Good too.

In the embodiment, the light amount level is not provided with an operation means such as the volume adjustment knob 140, and can be adjusted only by operating the light amount operation means 40, but the light amount level is also the same as the above-mentioned volume level. , it may be configured to be adjustable by a light amount adjustment knob (instep operation means) arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1 and the light amount operation means 40. That is, all the above descriptions regarding the volume level can be read as the light amount level. In this case, a light amount adjustment knob may be provided separately from the volume adjustment knob 140, or the volume adjustment knob 140 and the light amount adjustment knob may be used in common. When a light amount adjustment knob is provided separately from the volume adjustment knob 140, the number of stages of the hall setting value may be made different. Furthermore, the number of stages of the player setting value may be made different depending on the volume and the amount of light.

Regarding the volume level setting table shown in FIG. 49, etc., the minimum value that can be selected by the player for each hole setting value is set to the same value for each hole setting value, and the player can select according to the selected hole setting value. Although it was decided to make each upper limit value different by varying the amount of change in the possible setting value, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, each upper limit value may be set to be different by making the amount of change in the setting value selectable by the player the same depending on the selected hole setting value.

Regarding the volume level setting table for error sounds shown in FIG. The volume level setting table may be referred to. In this case, by setting all the multiple values that can be selected based on the hole setting value 1 to be the same value, when the player operates the front operation means during an error, the volume level setting table for the error sound can be set. Even if the reference destination is changed, the selected values are all the same, so the actual output volume level will not be changed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from changing the output volume level during error notification. In addition, if the reference destination of the volume level setting table for error sound is changed by operating the volume adjustment knob 140, different values will be selected before and after the change, and in this case, will change the actual output volume. As a result, the output volume level during error notification can be changed by hall employees. In addition, when the reference destination of the error sound volume level setting table is changed by operating the volume adjustment knob 140, the error sound volume is set so that the same value is selected before and after the change. By setting the values in the level setting table, the output volume level during error notification may be configured such that it cannot be changed by hall employees.

If the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated while the volume adjustment notification image PV is being displayed, the volume adjustment notification image PV that is being displayed may be hidden. Further, after being hidden once, it may be displayed again. Moreover, when displaying again, it is desirable to update and display the display content of the volume adjustment notification image PV according to the updated value after the change. In addition, when displaying the screen again, it may be displayed using a volume adjustment operation by the player as a trigger, or it may be displayed again when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after being hidden.

Regarding the volume adjustment notification image PV shown in FIG. It is desirable to set the priority of the display so that it is in front of the effect display and symbol display related to the game. Furthermore, at least the bar indicating the current volume level value may be given a higher display priority than the game-related effect display or symbol display, and the bar indicating the selectable range and the bar indicating the non-selectable range may be set. The display priority of the bar may be set lower than that of the game-related effect display or symbol display. Alternatively, the configuration may be reversed. In addition, the bar indicating the unselectable range is set to be in front of the effect display or symbol display, and at least one of the bar indicating the current volume level value and the bar indicating the selectable range is set to the effect related to the game. The priority of the display may be set lower than that of the display or the symbol display.

In addition, by making the bar showing the current volume level value, the bar showing the selectable range, and the bar showing the non-selectable range transparent, the priority of each display can be changed to show the effects related to the game. Even if the display is set to be in front of the symbol display or the symbol display, it is possible to display the effect display related to the game and the symbol display without reducing the visibility of the symbol display. In this case, at least one or all of the bar indicating the current volume level value, the bar indicating the selectable range, and the bar indicating the non-selectable range may be displayed in a transparent manner. It's okay.

The sub-control means (sub-control board) has a storage area (hard Vol) for storing the volume value based on the volume adjustment knob 140 and a storage area (soft Vol) for storing the volume value based on the operation of the volume operating means 39. You may prepare it. These are for storing setting values selected from the aforementioned volume level setting table. The volume value based on the volume adjustment knob 140 is a predetermined value selected from the volume level setting table based on the above-mentioned initial position, and the volume value based on the operation of the volume operation means 39 is a predetermined value selected based on the operation by the player. This is a predetermined value selected from the volume level setting table.

Incidentally, in each of the embodiments described below, it is desirable to use a volume level setting table in which each upper limit value is set as the initial position as the initial position set according to the position of the volume adjustment knob 140. It is not limited to this. Further, the volume value based on the volume operation means 39 is a predetermined value selected from the volume level setting table based on the initial position, but is not limited to this. For example, in the event of an error, the volume adjustment knob A predetermined value may be acquired from the error table according to the position of the volume control knob 140, and the predetermined value may be stored in a storage area (hard Vol) that stores the volume value based on the volume adjustment knob 140.

First, when the power is turned on, predetermined values corresponding to the position of the volume adjustment knob 140 are stored in a storage area (hard Vol) and a storage area (soft Vol), respectively. Based on the predetermined value stored in the storage area (Soft Vol), a storage area (Soft Vol. ) is stored. In this way, the initial setting process of setting predetermined values in each storage area is performed when the power is turned on.

After the initial setting process is completed, a monitoring process is performed in which the position of the volume adjustment knob 140 and the contents of the storage area (hard Vol) are periodically compared and monitored. In this monitoring process, if the position of the volume adjustment knob 140 and the contents of the storage area (hard Vol) match, the monitoring process ends, but if they do not match, it is determined that the volume adjustment knob 140 has been operated. , predetermined values corresponding to the changed position of the volume adjustment knob 140 are stored in a storage area (hard Vol) and a storage area (soft Vol), respectively. Next, based on the value of the changed storage area (Soft Vol), a new predetermined value is added to the storage area (total volume storage area) that stores the total volume used to determine the final output sound. be remembered. Through this series of processing, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated, the output sound emitted by the gaming machine is changed.

Next, a description will be given of the changing process when the volume operating means 39 is operated by the player. When the volume operating means 39 is operated by the player, a predetermined value corresponding to the operation is not stored in the storage area (hard Vol), but only in the storage area (soft Vol). Next, based on the value of the changed storage area (soft Vol), a new predetermined value is added to the storage area (total volume storage area) that stores the total volume used to determine the final output volume. be remembered. Through this series of processing, when the volume operating means 39 is operated, the output volume emitted by the gaming machine is changed. Furthermore, when the volume operating means 39 is operated by the player, the above-mentioned change process is executed, and a display process is executed to transmit a signal for displaying the volume adjustment notification image PV on the display means. By combining these processes, the output volume of the gaming machine can be adjusted, and the player can know the details of the adjustment.

Next, an error sound with a higher priority than the sound related to the game (not limited to those notifying abnormalities in the gaming machine, but also including RAM clear notification, backup return notification, setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, etc.) is output. The error notification process in this case will be explained.

When a specific error occurs, the predetermined value for error output is not stored in the storage area (Soft Vol), but is stored in the storage area (Soft Vol) that stores the total volume used to determine the final output volume. total volume storage area). As a result, when a specific error occurs, the output sound emitted by the gaming machine is changed to an error output sound. Furthermore, while the error sound is being output, it is necessary to stop outputting audio related to the game to make the error sound stand out. For this purpose, set the maximum value for the error volume value to determine the output sound of the channel where the error sound is registered, and set the maximum value for the error volume value to determine the output sound of the channel where the game-related sound is registered. The volume value is set to 0. Incidentally, the sub-control means determines the final output volume based on the relationship between the gaming volume value, the error volume value, and a predetermined value stored in a storage area (total volume storage area). For example, if either value is 0, the final output volume is 0 regardless of the other value. In this way, the sub-control means sets/changes the game volume value and the error volume value, and sets/changes the predetermined value stored in the storage area (total volume storage area), thereby controlling the final volume value. is configured to adjust the output volume. Moreover, the volume value for games and the volume value for errors may be prepared not in one type but in plural types, and have a primary volume that determines the primary volume value and a secondary volume that determines the secondary volume value. You can do it like this. In this case, the sound related to the game is emitted at the output volume calculated from the primary volume value for the game, the secondary volume value for the game, and the total volume value, and the sound related to the error is emitted at the output volume calculated from the primary volume value for the game, the secondary volume value for the game, and the total volume value, and the sound related to the error is emitted at the output volume calculated from the primary volume value for the game, the secondary volume value for the game, and the total volume value. The sound will be emitted at an output volume calculated from the next volume value and the total volume value.

Here, an example in the case where a specific error occurs will be described. For example, when a specific error 1 (eg, movable body error) occurs, the game machine uses sound, lamps, and display means to notify that it is in an error state. At this time, the sub-control means refers to the error flag indicating the error state and executes notification using sound, lamps, and display means. ), the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) that stores the total volume. As a result, when an error occurs, the total volume is determined based on the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol) rather than the storage area (soft Vol), so the output volume of the error sound is It will be determined based on a predetermined value depending on the position of the adjustment knob 140. With this configuration, the output volume when an error is occurring can be adjusted/changed using the volume adjustment knob 140, and a hall employee can adjust/change the output volume when an error is occurring. Furthermore, since the predetermined value stored in the storage area (software Vol) is not referenced while an error occurs, even if the volume control means 39 is operated by the player, the storage area (software volume) is The total volume is determined based on the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol), regardless of whether the value of the soft Vol) has been changed (it may be changed or not changed). Therefore, the value of the storage area (total volume storage area) will not be changed. This makes it possible to prevent acts such as intentionally lowering the output volume when an error occurs to make it difficult to detect fraudulent activity.

In this case, while an error is occurring, it is desirable that the volume adjustment notification image PV is not displayed on the display means even if the volume operation means 39 is operated by the player. Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, and the adjustment content of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the player's operation, but in this case, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be It is desirable to configure the adjustment contents so that they are not reflected in the actual output volume.

Further, in this case, it may be possible to allow the player to adjust the amount of light. However, although the brightness of the light emitting pattern depending on the game performance can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the system so that the brightness of the light emitting pattern depending on the error cannot be adjusted. Furthermore, it may be possible to disable the player from adjusting the amount of light during error notification.

Then, when the specific error 1 (e.g. movable object error) ends, the sub-control means refers to the fact that the error flag indicating the error state has been turned OFF, and controls the sound/lamp/display means. Terminate notification using . At this time, using the OFF of the error flag as a trigger, the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) instead of the storage area (hard Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) that stores the total volume. Then, as before the error occurred, the total volume is set based on the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol).

Next, a case where a specific error 2 (eg, door opening error) occurs will be explained (the explanation of the same parts as in the case of the above-mentioned specific error 1 will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly explained). When a door opening error occurs, the game machine uses sounds, lamps, and display means to notify the user of the error condition, but specific error 2 (e.g. door opening error) is an error caused by sound. The notification ends at a predetermined timing, the error notification by the display means ends at the timing of the event that is the target of the error (in this case, the door is closed), and the error notification by the lamp ends at the timing of the event that is the target of the error (in this case, the door is closed). It is configured to end at a predetermined timing (30 seconds) after the end of the process.

(Pattern 1) At a predetermined timing to end the sound error notification, the production control means uses the presence or absence of error sound output as a trigger to store a value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) instead of the storage area (hard Vol). is stored in a storage area that stores the total volume (total volume storage area). In addition, the volume adjustment notification image PV is hidden until a predetermined timing when the sound error notification ends, and can be displayed at the predetermined timing when the sound error notification ends (displayed when the player performs an adjustment operation). (or intentionally displayed). Here, as a modification example when the volume adjustment notification image PV is not displayed, the content may be the same as the content of the volume adjustment notification image PV described in the above-mentioned specific error 1 (example: movable object error).

Further, the volume adjustment by the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume adjustment by operating the volume operation means 39 may be configured in the same manner as described in the above-mentioned specific error 1 (eg, movable body error).

(Pattern 2) At a predetermined timing when the error-targeted event (here, door closing) ends, the performance control means uses the detection of the error-targeted event (here, door closing) as a trigger, and the storage area ( The value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) rather than the hard Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area) that stores the total volume.

In addition, the volume adjustment notification image PV is hidden until the predetermined timing when the event subject to the error (here door closing) ends, and the volume adjustment notification image PV is hidden until the predetermined timing when the event subject to the error (here door closing) ends. It may also be possible to display (display when there is an adjustment operation by the player or display intentionally). Here, as a modification example when the volume adjustment notification image PV is not displayed, the content may be the same as the content of the volume adjustment notification image PV described in the above-mentioned specific error 1 (example: movable object error). Further, the volume adjustment by the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume adjustment by operating the volume operation means 39 may be configured in the same manner as described in the above-mentioned specific error 1 (eg, movable body error).

(Pattern 3) The sub-control means indicates that the error flag is turned OFF at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the error target event (in this case, door closing) is completed. Using this as a trigger, the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) instead of the storage area (hard Vol) is stored in the storage area that stores the total volume (total volume storage area).

Additionally, the volume adjustment notification image PV is not displayed until a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the error target event (in this case, door closing) ends, and the error notification using the lamp does not display the volume adjustment notification image PV. Can be displayed at a predetermined timing (30 seconds) after the event subject to the error (in this case, the door is closed) has ended (displayed when the player performs an adjustment operation or intentionally displayed) You may make it so that Here, as a modification example when the volume adjustment notification image PV is not displayed, the configuration may be the same as the content of the volume adjustment bar described in the above-mentioned specific error 1 (example: movable object error). Further, the volume adjustment by the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume adjustment by operating the volume operation means 39 may be configured in the same manner as described in the above-mentioned specific error 1 (eg, movable body error). Further, in these cases, it may be possible to allow the player to adjust the amount of light. However, although the brightness of the light emitting pattern depending on the game effect can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the brightness of the light emitting pattern depending on the error so that it cannot be adjusted. Furthermore, it may be possible to disable the player from adjusting the amount of light during error notification.

Next, we will explain the case where specific error 3 (e.g. RAM clear notification) occurs (we will omit the explanation of the same parts as in the case of specific errors 1 and 2 above, and will mainly explain the different parts. ). Furthermore, the present embodiment may be applied to either or both of the notification when the RAM is cleared after performing the setting change process, and the notification when the RAM is cleared without performing the setting change process. good.

The sub-control means performs the above-mentioned initial setting process when the gaming machine is powered on. If the power is turned on with RAM clearing, then the gaming machine uses sound, lamps, and display means to notify that the RAM has been cleared. At the same time, the initialization operation of the movable body is executed. At this time, the effect control means executes the same process as the specific error 1 described above, using the ON of the error flag (RAM clear notification flag may be prepared) as a trigger. Furthermore, the same process as the specific error 1 described above is executed using the turning off of the error flag (a RAM clear notification flag may be prepared) as a trigger.

(Pattern 1) During the RAM clear notification, the volume may be adjusted using the switch on the back side, but it may be configured such that the volume adjustment using the operating means on the front side is disabled. The volume adjustment bar may have the same contents as the specific error 1 described above.

(Pattern 2) During the RAM clear notification, the volume adjustment knob 140 is enabled to adjust the volume, and the volume adjustment by the volume operation means 39 is disabled at least until initialization of the movable body is completed. Good too. Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may also be configured to be hidden until at least the initialization of the movable body is completed, and to be able to be displayed thereafter. The contents related to non-display and the contents related to display possible may be the same as those for specific error 1 described above.

(Pattern 3) During RAM clear notification, the configuration may be such that the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume operating means 39. Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may also be configured to be displayable. The content related to displayability may be the same as the specific error 1 described above.

Further, in these cases, the player may be allowed to adjust the amount of light even during the RAM clear notification. However, although the brightness of the light emitting pattern according to the game performance can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the system so that the brightness of the light emitting pattern according to the RAM clear notification cannot be adjusted. Furthermore, it may be possible to disable the player from adjusting the amount of light during the RAM clear notification.

Next, a second embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, unlike the embodiments described so far, the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol) is changed to the storage area (hard Vol) that stores the total volume based on predetermined information indicating that an error has occurred. Instead of storing the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) in the storage area (total volume storage area), the value stored in the storage area (soft Vol) is stored in the storage area that stores the total volume (total volume storage area). In this embodiment, for example, when a specific error 1 (e.g. movable body error) occurs, the value stored in the storage area (Soft Vol) even during the error is transferred to the storage area (Soft Vol) that stores the total volume. Since the value stored in the storage area (software Vol) is stored in the storage area (software Vol), for example, when the volume operation means 39 is operated by the player, the value stored in the storage area (software Vol) will be changed. As a result, the predetermined value of the storage area (total volume storage area) is changed, resulting in a configuration in which the player can freely change the output volume of the sound related to the error using the volume operating means 39. Therefore, in this embodiment, the volume adjustment by the volume operation means 39 is disabled during an error. With this configuration, even if the volume operation means 39 is operated by the player, the value of the storage area (soft Vol) will not be changed, and as a result, the value of the storage area (total volume) will not be changed. Since the value of the storage area) is also not changed, the output volume of the sound related to the error cannot be changed by the volume operating means 39.

Furthermore, even if the volume operation means 39 is operated by the player during error notification, the actual output volume cannot be adjusted/changed, but the volume adjustment notification image PV will still be displayed. You can also do this. In this case, in response to the volume operation means 39 being operated, a signal for updating the display content of the volume adjustment notification image PV is transmitted from the sub-control means to the display means. As a result, although the actual output volume cannot be adjusted/changed, it is possible to update the display content of the volume adjustment notification image PV. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the volume adjustment notification image PV is not displayed during error notification.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even during an error, the value stored in the storage area (Soft Vol) is stored in the storage area that stores the total volume (total volume storage area). is operated, the position of the volume adjustment knob 140 and the value stored in the storage area (hard Vol) will be different values, so the new predetermined value will be set in the storage area (hard Vol) and the storage area (soft Vol). Vol). As a result, the new predetermined value stored in the storage area (software Vol) is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area). The audio output volume can be adjusted/changed. Further, during error notification, the configuration may be such that the output volume of the audio related to the error cannot be adjusted/changed even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated.

Further, the player may be allowed to adjust the light intensity even during error notification. However, although the brightness of the light emitting pattern depending on the game effect can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the brightness of the light emitting pattern depending on the error so that it cannot be adjusted. Furthermore, it may be possible to disable the player from adjusting the amount of light during error notification.

Next, a case where a specific error 2 (eg, door opening error) occurs will be explained (the explanation of the same parts as in the case of the above-mentioned specific error 1 will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly explained). When a door opening error occurs, the game machine uses sounds, lamps, and display means to notify the user of the error condition, but specific error 2 (e.g. door opening error) is an error caused by sound. The notification ends at a predetermined timing, the error notification by the display means ends at the timing of the event that is the target of the error (in this case, the door is closed), and the error notification by the lamp ends at the timing of the event that is the target of the error (in this case, the door is closed). It is configured to end at a predetermined timing (30 seconds) after the end of the process.

(Pattern 1) The production control means is configured to disable the volume adjustment by the volume operation means 39 using the turning on of an error flag indicating that an error has occurred as a trigger. Further, at a predetermined timing at which the error notification by sound ends, the volume control unit 39 is configured to enable volume adjustment using the presence or absence of error sound output as a trigger.

In addition, the volume adjustment notification image PV on the display means is hidden until a predetermined timing when the sound error notification ends, and can be displayed at the predetermined timing when the sound error notification ends (if the player performs an adjustment operation) (or may be intentionally displayed). Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, and the adjustment content of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the player's operation, but in this case, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be It is desirable to configure the adjustment contents so that they are not reflected in the actual output volume.

Further, during error notification, the configuration may be such that the output volume of the audio related to the error cannot be adjusted/changed even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated. Further, the player may be allowed to adjust the light intensity even during error notification. However, although the brightness of the light emitting pattern depending on the game effect can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the brightness of the light emitting pattern depending on the error so that it cannot be adjusted. Furthermore, it may be possible to disable the player from adjusting the amount of light during error notification.

(Pattern 2) The effect control means is configured to disable volume adjustment using the front operating means when an error flag indicating that an error has occurred is turned on.

Further, at a predetermined timing when the error event (here, door closing) ends, the volume can be adjusted by the volume control means 39, using the detection of the error event (here, door closing) as a trigger. Configure it so that

In addition, the volume adjustment notification image PV on the display means is hidden until a predetermined timing when the event subject to the error (here door closing) ends, and the event subject to the error (here door closing) ends. It may be possible to display it at a predetermined timing (it may be displayed when there is an adjustment operation by the player, or it may be displayed intentionally). Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, and the adjustment content of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the player's operation, but in this case, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be It is desirable to configure the adjustment contents so that they are not reflected in the actual output volume.

Further, during error notification, the configuration may be such that the output volume of the audio related to the error cannot be adjusted/changed even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated. Further, the player may be allowed to adjust the light intensity even during error notification. However, although the brightness of the light emitting pattern depending on the game effect can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the brightness of the light emitting pattern depending on the error so that it cannot be adjusted. Furthermore, it may be possible to disable the player from adjusting the amount of light during error notification.

(Pattern 3) The production control means indicates that the error flag is turned OFF at a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the error target event (in this case, door closing) is completed. is configured to disable the volume adjustment by the volume control means using this as a trigger. Furthermore, the error notification by the lamp is triggered by the error flag turning OFF at a predetermined timing (30 seconds after the end of the error target event (in this case, door closing)), and the volume control device 39, the volume can be adjusted.

In addition, the error notification using the lamp hides the volume adjustment notification image PV on the display means until a predetermined timing (30 seconds later) after the event that is the target of the error (in this case, the door is closed) ends, and the error notification using the lamp The error notification can be displayed at a predetermined timing (30 seconds) after the event that is the subject of the error (in this case, the door is closed) (it can be displayed when the player makes an adjustment operation or intentionally (displayed). Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, and the adjustment content of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the player's operation, but in this case, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be It is desirable to configure the adjustment contents so that they are not reflected in the actual output volume.

Further, during error notification, the configuration may be such that the output volume of the audio related to the error cannot be adjusted/changed even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated. Further, the player may be allowed to adjust the light intensity even during error notification. However, although the brightness of the light emitting pattern depending on the game effect can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the brightness of the light emitting pattern depending on the error so that it cannot be adjusted. Furthermore, it may be possible to disable the player from adjusting the amount of light during error notification.

Next, we will explain the case where specific error 3 (e.g. RAM clear notification) occurs (we will omit the explanation of the same parts as in the case of specific errors 1 and 2 above, and will mainly explain the different parts. ). Furthermore, the present embodiment may be applied to either or both of the notification when the RAM is cleared after performing the setting change process, and the notification when the RAM is cleared without performing the setting change process. good.

The sub-control means performs the above-mentioned initial setting process when the gaming machine is powered on. If the power is turned on with RAM clearing, then the gaming machine uses sound, lamps, and display means to notify that the RAM has been cleared. At the same time, the initialization operation of the movable body is executed.

(Pattern 1) The performance control means is configured to disable the volume adjustment by the volume operation means 39 using the ON of an error flag (a RAM clear notification flag may be prepared) as a trigger.

Furthermore, the configuration is such that the volume can be adjusted by the volume operating means 39 using the OFF of the error flag (a RAM clear notification flag may be prepared) as a trigger. Also, during the RAM clear notification, the volume adjustment notification image PV of the display means is hidden, and can be displayed at the timing when the RAM clear notification ends (it is displayed when the player performs an adjustment operation or intentionally (displayed). Further, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be displayed, and the adjustment content of the volume adjustment notification image PV may be changed by the player's operation, but in this case, the volume adjustment notification image PV may be It is desirable to configure the adjustment contents so that they are not reflected in the actual output volume.

Further, the configuration may be such that the output volume of the error-related sound cannot be adjusted/changed even if the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated during the RAM clear notification. Further, the player may be allowed to adjust the amount of light even during the RAM clear notification. However, although the brightness of the light emitting pattern depending on the game effect can be adjusted, it is desirable to configure the brightness of the light emitting pattern depending on the error so that it cannot be adjusted. Furthermore, it may be possible to disable the player from adjusting the amount of light during error notification.

(Pattern 2) The configuration may be the same as the pattern 1 described above, but the volume adjustment notification image PV may have a different configuration. For example, at the timing when the initialization operation of the movable body is completed during RAM clearing, the volume adjustment notification image PV of the display means can be displayed from non-display (displayed when the player performs an adjustment operation or intentionally (displayed).

(Pattern 3) The configuration may be the same as the pattern 1 described above, but the volume adjustment notification image PV may have a different configuration. For example, at the timing when the RAM clear notification is started, the volume adjustment notification image PV of the display means can be changed from non-display to display (displayed when the player performs an adjustment operation or intentionally displayed). You can do it like this.

Next, a third embodiment will be described. During error notification, the maximum volume value for error output is set in the storage area (total volume storage area) that stores the total volume used to determine the final output sound, and the above-mentioned primary volume value is determined. The volume value may be set in accordance with the position of the volume adjustment knob 140 for the primary volume to be used or the secondary volume to be determined. With such a configuration, the output volume of the error sound can be set to an output volume corresponding to the position of the volume adjustment knob 140. Further, as described above, when the volume is adjusted by operating the volume operation means 39, the value of the storage area (soft Vol) is updated, and the updated value is stored in the storage area (total volume storage area). It will be remembered. This allows the player to adjust the volume by operating the volume control means 34, but in the case of this embodiment, during error notification, the total sound used to determine the final output sound Since the maximum volume value for error output is set in the storage area for storing the volume (total volume storage area), even if the volume is adjusted by the volume operation means 34 during error notification. Also, the value of the storage area (total volume storage area) is not updated, and it is possible to prevent the player from lowering the output volume during error notification. Furthermore, when the volume adjustment knob 140 is operated, the volume value corresponding to the position is set as the secondary volume value, so that the hall side can adjust the output volume during error notification. ing. In addition, the sounds related to games are emitted at an output volume calculated from the primary volume value for games, the secondary volume value for games, and the total volume value, and the sounds related to errors are emitted at the output volume calculated from the primary volume value for games, the secondary volume value for games, and the total volume value. The sound is emitted at an output volume calculated from the volume value and the total volume value, but in this embodiment, during error notification, the primary volume value for gaming and the secondary volume value for gaming are set to mute values (0) or It is preferable that a small tone value (10) is set, and a volume value corresponding to the volume adjustment knob 140 is set as the primary volume value for error and the secondary volume value for error. This prevents the error sound from being obstructed by the game sound, making it possible to make the error sound more prominent.

In the embodiment described above, the volume of the sound related to the error notification cannot be adjusted by operating the volume control means 34 during the error notification, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be adjustable. In this case, the volume may be adjusted in multiple stages, but the configuration may be such that the sound related to the error sound cannot be muted.

Regarding the sound during error notification, the range in which the volume can be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140 and the range in which the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume operation means 39 may be configured to be different. In that case, the range in which the volume can be adjusted by the volume adjustment knob 140 may be larger than the range in which the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume operating means 39, or vice versa. Further, when adjusting the volume using the volume adjustment knob 140, the configuration may be such that the sound during error notification can be muted. In that case, the configuration may be such that the sound during error notification cannot be muted by operating the volume control means 39.

Depending on the type of error, the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment knob 140, or the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume operation means 39, and depending on the type of error, the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment knob 140 or the volume operation means 39. It may also be configured such that the volume can be adjusted. For example, launch position notification that notifies the launch position of the game ball, launch position warning notification that warns the exact launch position when the game ball is launched in a direction that is not the proper launch position, and In the case of an error notification in which the player himself is complicit in the occurrence/removal of an error, such as a tray full notification that indicates that the game ball payout operation cannot be executed because the tray that stores balls is full. may be configured so that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume operating means 39. Further, depending on the type of error, the volume may be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume operation means 39.

In addition, in the case of an error notification in which the player himself is not involved in the occurrence/removal of the error, such as when the payout operation cannot be performed normally or when the movable body cannot be operated normally, the volume adjustment knob 140 It may also be possible to adjust the volume. Further, the volume may be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume operation means 39.

In addition, in the case of an error that is suspected of being a thief, such as a door opening, a magnetic sensor error, a vibration sensor error, or a radio wave sensor error, the volume may be adjusted using the volume adjustment knob 140. Further, the configuration may be such that volume adjustment is not possible.

Furthermore, the volume may be adjustable using the volume adjustment knob 140 for predetermined notifications that are performed when the power is turned on, such as RAM clear notification, setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, and backup recovery notification. Further, the volume may be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment knob 140 and the volume operation means 39, or may be configured such that the volume cannot be adjusted.

In the case of a gaming machine that displays a demo screen when the non-gaming state continues for a predetermined period of time, if the volume is adjusted by operating the volume control means 39 in the non-gaming state, It may be configured to clear the count for a predetermined time. Further, in this case, when the volume is adjusted using the volume adjustment knob 99, the configuration may be such that the count of the predetermined time until the demonstration screen is displayed is not cleared.

Although the embodiments described above have been described as separate embodiments for clarity, the embodiments may be combined. Furthermore, all of the contents of different embodiments may be combined, or a portion of each embodiment may be extracted and combined into another embodiment.

In the embodiment, regarding the lower limit information and upper limit information that define the range of jackpot judgment random numbers, an example was shown in which the upper limit information is different for each setting value and the lower limit information is common. The value information may be different and the upper limit information may be common, or both the lower limit information and the upper limit information may be different for each set value.

Furthermore, the present invention can be similarly implemented in various pinball game machines such as arrangement ball machines and mahjong ball game machines, as well as game machines other than pinball game machines such as slot machines.

18 Lower speaker (audio output means)
25 Upper speaker (audio output means)
106 Liquid crystal display means (display means)
123a Sub-control board (display effect execution means, sound effect execution means)

Claims (1)

Equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying symbols in a variable manner,
In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stopped symbols after fluctuation by the symbol display means become in a specific manner,
It is possible to execute a specific notice while the above-mentioned symbol is displayed as changing,
The specific notice has a first half that does not yet suggest the possibility of the specific mode, and a second half that suggests the possibility of the specific mode after the first half,
an audio output means capable of outputting audio related to the specific notice when executing the specific notice;
and a vibration sound generating means capable of generating a vibration sound by vibrating a predetermined part when executing the specific notice,
comprising a volume level setting means capable of setting the volume level of the audio output means between a maximum volume level and a minimum volume level ;
The vibration sound generating means generates the vibration sound for a predetermined time when executing the second half section,
The audio related to the specific notice in the latter half section is audible regardless of the volume level,
When the maximum volume level is set, the vibration sound is easily audible;
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured so that it becomes difficult to hear the vibrational sound when the volume level is set to the minimum volume level .